new-to-tl biblatex-dw 1.3 (11mar10)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@17433 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

28 files changed, 9613 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/CHANGES
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7f26cefd0cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/CHANGES
@@ -0,0 +1,550 @@
+biblatex-dw 2010/03/11 v1.3
+Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+
+ Version history
+ ---------------
+
+v1.3 [2010/03/11]
+
+This version of biblatex-dw supports biblatex 0.9. Please 
+note that you have to update biblatex as well if you would 
+like to use biblatex-dw 1.3! Users might need to update 
+their data due to some changes in biblatex, especially 
+concerned with date specifications. Please follow the hints 
+for users given in biblatex's RELEASE notes.
+
+Further changes in this release:
+ - The option 'isrn' and 'issn' were dropped. Their
+   functionality can be achieved by the biblatex option 
+   'isbn'.
+ - BUGFIX: When using 'idembibformat=dash', the @inreference 
+   entries had a wrong punctuation inside the title. This is 
+   now fixed.
+ - Option 'pseudoauthor' changed: if set to true (and the 
+   entry option 'pseudoauthor' is used), the author of this 
+   entry is printed. The new commands \bibleftpseudo and 
+   \bibrightpseudo are used to enclose the author. These 
+   commands are empty by default. If the global option 
+   'pseudoauthor' is set to 'false', the author of entries 
+   with the entry option 'pseudoauthor' are not printed at 
+   all. The default value for the global option is 'true' 
+   (i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry 
+   option 'pseudoauthor').
+ - New command \locationdatepunct for the punctuation 
+   between location and year/date. The default is \addspace.
+ - New command \locationpublisherpunct for the punctuation
+   between location and publisher. The default is 
+   \addcolon\space.
+ - New command \publisherdatepunct for the punctuation 
+   between publisher and year/date. The default is 
+   \addcomma\space.
+ 
+v1.2o [2010/02/14]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the options 'xref=true' and 
+   'useeditor=false', the editor was not printed in the 
+   bibliography. This is now fixed. Also, some bugs 
+   regarding the xref functionality in citations could be 
+   fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The editors in @incollection, @inproceedings and 
+   @inreference entries were printed using the name format 
+   'sortname' ('Lastname, Firstname') where it should have 
+   been the name format 'byeditor' ('Firstname Lastname'). 
+   This is now fixed.   
+ - New option 'omiteditor': If one uses 'useeditor=false' 
+   and 'omiteditor=true', the editor in citations will be 
+   omitted. The same applies to the xref functionality in 
+   the bibliography. With 'useeditor=true', this option has 
+   no effect. The standard for this option is 'false'.
+ - The limitation regarding the combination of 'xref=true', 
+   'edbyidem=true' and 'useeditor=false' is no longer valid.
+   That means, it is not necessary to have the editor in the 
+   child entry as well in order to get an 'idem' string.
+ - Extended the documentation.
+
+v1.2n [2010/01/24]
+ - The option 'edbeforetitle' was discarded. The same 
+   functionality can be obtained by the option 'useeditor'. 
+   In this context, some bugs could be resolved. 
+ - New option 'omitpages': if set to 'true', the page range 
+   of @article, @inbook, @incollection or @inproceedings 
+   entries will be suppressed in full citations. 
+   The standard value is 'false'.
+ - Extended the documentation regarding the xref 
+   functionality.
+
+v1.2m [2010/01/18]
+ - BUGFIX: Changed the default of \citerevsdnamedelim which 
+   used to be a \slash. Now it is empty, because otherwise 
+   it produced two slashes in some circumstances.
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw with 'xref=true', the reference to 
+   the first entry did not work if the first citation of a 
+   parent was cited via a child. This is now fixed. 
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw the punctuation of @collection 
+   entries was wrong when using a prenote in conjunction 
+   with 'useeditor=false' or when there was no editor. This 
+   is now fixed.
+ - The biblatex option 'singletitle' can now be used both 
+   with authortitle-dw and footnote-dw. Using this option, a
+   work's title is only printed if there is not more than
+   one work by the author or editor. 
+ - New entry option 'pseudoauthor'. If set to true, the 
+   author is put in brackets. This is useful for e.g. 
+   editions of works whose authors are not named, but are 
+   known. See the documentation for details. The entry 
+   option does only have effect if the global option 
+   'pseudoauthor' is set to 'true'. The default value is 
+   'false'.
+   
+v1.2l [2009/10/19]
+ - BUGFIX: With footnote-dw, the references to the first 
+   citations did not work, when refsections were used. This 
+   is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: With xref=true, when no volume was present in an 
+   @inreference entry as well as in its corresponding 
+   @reference entry, the bibstring 'vol.' was printed. This 
+   is now fixed. 
+ - New option 'shortjournal'. If set to 'true', the field 
+   'shortjournal' is used instead of 'journaltitle'. This is
+   useful for journal abbreviations. The default is 'false'.
+ - New option 'acronyms'. If set to 'true', shorthands (and 
+   with 'shortjournal=true' also the abbreviated journal 
+   titles) are set with the command \mkbibacro, but only if 
+   the entry option 'acronym' is set to 'true'. The default 
+   is 'false'.
+ - New option 'pageref' (in footnote-dw only). If set to 
+   'true', it adds the page to the footnote number pointing 
+   to the full citation if it is located on a different 
+   page. This option is the same as in the standard styles 
+   'verbose-note' and 'verbose-inote'. The default is false.
+ - In footnote-dw, the pointer to the earlier citation is 
+   suppressed if a shorthand exists and the option 'citedas' 
+   is true. Note that you can override the global option 
+   'citedas' by setting the entry option 'citedas'.
+
+v1.2k [2009/08/22]
+ Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8e. Note that from this 
+ version on biblatex 0.8e is required, so you have to update 
+ biblatex as well if you would like to use biblatex-dw 1.2k!
+   - Compound abbreviations (introduced in biblatex-dw 1.2i)
+     are now separated by the new biblatex command 
+     '\addabthinspace'; this affects only the German 
+     localization in strings like 'hg. v.'
+   - The improved concatenation of roles is used. See 
+     biblatex's release notes for details.
+   - The new auxiliary macros for ordinals are used. See 
+     biblatex's release notes for details.
+ BUGFIXES
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'ibidpage' did not work with 
+   footnote-dw. This is now fixed. 
+ Changed Entry Types
+ - @inreference
+   Up to now, this entry type was an alias for 
+   @incollection. From now on, this entry type can be used 
+   for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. For 
+   details on how @inreference entries differ from @
+   incollection entries, please consult the documentation.
+   The @reference type remains an alias for @collection.
+ New Options
+ - 'isrn' and 'pagetotal'
+   These options can take the values 'true' and 'false'. 
+   With these options you can decide whether you want to 
+   have printed the corresponding fields or not. 
+   The default for these options is 'false'. 
+ - 'edstringincitations'
+   If set to 'true', the editor and translator strings are 
+   shown in the citations (not only in the full citations). 
+   The default is 'true'.
+ - 'series=standard|afteryear'
+   If set to 'afteryear', the series is printed after the 
+   year. This affects the entry types @book, @inbook, 
+   @collection, @incollection, @proceedings, @inproceedings 
+   and @manual.
+ New Commands
+ - 'seriespunct'
+   punctuation before the series (of a book etc.). This 
+   punctuation is set inside the parentheses. You can set it 
+   e.g. to '=\addspace' which is common in some fields. The 
+   default is empty, i.e. the series is printed right after 
+   the opening round bracket.
+ - 'sernumstring'
+   punctuation between series (of a book etc.) and number. 
+   The default is '\addspace'. You can easily redefine it, 
+   e.g.:
+     \renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+       \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+   This would give '(Name of Series, vol. N)'.
+ - 'herenamepunct'
+   If the 'herename' is used, the punctuation before the 
+   herename is determined by 'herenamepunct'. The default is 
+   \addcomma\space.
+ Localization Changes
+ - In German localization, the strings 'withcommentator', 
+   'withannotator' and 'withintroduction' are shortened as 
+   follows:
+   -> withcommentator: komm. v.
+   -> withannotator: erläut. v.
+   -> withintroduction: eingel. v.
+   The long versions stay the same as in standard biblatex. 
+
+v1.2j [2009/08/16]
+ - This is just a bugfix release. The only files changed are
+   footnote-dw.cbx, CHANGES, README and LIESMICH.
+ - BUGFIX: Since biblatex version 0.8e, footnote-dw gave an 
+   error (Undefined control sequence: \blx@addperiod). This 
+   is now fixed; thus, biblatex-dw (or rather footnote-dw) 
+   should work with the biblatex versions 0.8e, 0.8f, 0.8g 
+   and 0.8h, but it will not work with earlier versions.
+
+v1.2i [2009/05/10]
+ - BUGFIX: When using option 'usetranslator=true', the 
+   translator string was not aware of the option 
+   'editorstring'. This is now fixed.
+ - Improved bibmacro 'journal+issuetitle' which is now aware 
+   of the option 'edbeforetitle'.
+ - The 'typeeditor' field is now supported. It can take the 
+   values 'editor' and 'compiler'. This field determines the 
+   editor string after the name of the editor(s). The 
+   abbreviated forms are 'ed.' for 'editor' and 'comp.' for 
+   'compiler'. In German, both strings are the same 
+   ('Herausgeber' or 'Hrsg.').
+ - In English, the 'idem' string is now declined (idem, 
+   eadem, idem in singular; eidem, eaedem, eadem in plural) 
+   and no longer abbreviated, even if abbreviate=true is 
+   used.
+ - Improved the handling of 'origfields=true'.
+ - In German, the string 'reprint' (Nachdruck) is now 
+   abbreviated as 'Ndr.', not as 'Nachdr.'
+ - Compound abbreviations are now separated by a thin space 
+   rather than a normal one. At the moment, this affects 
+   only the German localization in strings like 'hg. v.'
+
+v1.2h [2009/03/29]
+ - BUGFIX: The 'idem' functionality is now also aware of 
+   page breaks. If the citation is the first on a page (or 
+   double page in twoside mode), the 'idem' is suppressed. 
+   If you don't want this behaviour, you can set the option 
+   'pagetracker=false'.
+
+v1.2g [2009/03/20]
+ - Option 'journalnumber' replaces 'journumafteryear'. The 
+   option was enhanced and can now take the values 
+   'standard', 'afteryear' and 'date'. The value 'standard' 
+   is the same as the old journumafteryear=false, 
+   'afteryear' is the same as the old journumafteryear=true. 
+   The new value 'date' assures that the date is printed, 
+   even if the field issue is given (this is not the case in 
+   the standard styles). Additionally, 'journalnumber=date' 
+   prints the number before the date, if the date (at least 
+   year and month) is given, but it prints the number after 
+   the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date is 
+   not further specified). See the documentation for 
+   details. The default is 'journalnumber=standard'.
+ - Improved german-dw.lbx.
+ - Adjusted the documentation for screen reading. A printer 
+   friendly version can still be compiled from the source.
+
+v1.2f [2009/02/15]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8c. Note that from 
+   this version on biblatex 0.8c is required, so you have to
+   update biblatex as well if you would like to use 
+   biblatex-dw 1.2f!
+   -> The biblatex-dw option 'idem' was replaced by the new
+      biblatex option 'idemtracker'. The standard setting is
+      'idemtracker=constrict'. If you would like to switch 
+      off the idem functionality, you can use 
+      'idemtracker=false'. For more information on the 
+      'idemtracker' option see the biblatex manual.
+ - New options 'doi', 'eprint', 'isbn' and 'issn' which can 
+   take the values 'true' and 'false'. With these options 
+   you can decide whether you want to have printed the 
+   corresponding fields or not. The default for these 
+   options is 'false' (as was the standard before). 
+ - New option 'idemfont' which can take the values 
+   'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold' and 'normal'. The default 
+   is none which means that the 'idem' string is printed in 
+   the font shape of 'namefont'. 
+ - New option 'ibidemfont' which can take the values 
+   'smallcaps', 'italic' and 'bold'. The default is none 
+   which means that the 'ibidem' string is printed in normal 
+   font shape.   
+ - New macro 'jourvolstring' which introduces the volume of
+   an article entry. The default is a space (as it was the
+   case before), but you can adjust it to your needs, e.g.:
+   \renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace vol\adddot\space}
+ - New macro 'journumstring' which introduces the number in
+   article entries, if the option 'journumafteryear' is set
+   to 'true'. The default for this macro is a comma, 
+   followed by the bibstring 'number' and a non-breakable 
+   space. You can redefine it to your needs, e.g.:
+   \renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace} 
+ - If there is no volume in an article entry, but the month
+   field is set, the date is separated from the journal 
+   title by a comma and a space, not only a space.
+ - Fixed some BUGS concerning the xref functionality. 
+ - Reorganized some bibliography drivers.
+ - Enhanced the documentation.
+
+v1.2e [2008/12/19]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8b. Note that from 
+   this version on biblatex 0.8b is required, so you have to
+   update biblatex as well if you would like to use 
+   biblatex-dw 1.2e!
+   -> The new biblatex option 'usetranslator' is supported.
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'firstfullname' introduced in version
+   1.2d had a bug which is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The 'idem' functionality did not work with the 
+   multicite commands. This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'journumafteryear': If set to 'true', the 
+   'number' in article entries is printed after the year and
+   introduced by the bibstring 'number'. If set to 'false',
+   the default behaviour is used, i.e. 'Journaltitle 
+   volume.number (year)'. The default is 'true'.
+   -> If 'journumafteryear' is set 'false', the separator
+      between volume and number in @article entries is now
+      configurable with the new command '\jourvolnumsep'. 
+      The default is a dot (which is also the default in
+      biblatex).
+ - When the 'volume' is missing, the parenthesis around the
+   year in @article entries is omitted.
+ - The multicite command \cites is now also always printed 
+   as footnote in 'footnote-dw'.
+ - Some changes in the internal code.
+ - Extended the documentation and examples.
+
+v1.2d [2008/12/07]
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw, the punctuation after the author/
+   editor in all citations but the first one was always a 
+   comma and not configurable by \citenamepunct. This is now 
+   fixed.
+ - New option 'firstfullname': when set to 'true', the 
+   commands \citeauthor and \textcite (with footnote-dw: 
+   \citeauthor only) give the full name of authors/editors 
+   when they have not been cited before, not only the last 
+   name. The default is 'false'.
+ - Support for biblatex version 0.8a including 
+   \MakeSentenceCase.
+ - Added lbx files with alternative strings for German and 
+   additional strings for both German and English (these 
+   strings were already included, but are now stored in the 
+   language mapping files).
+
+v1.2c [2008/11/15]
+ - New option 'idembibformat': When using 'idembib=true', 
+   you can choose whether you want to have an 'idem' string 
+   in the bibliography (idembibformat=idem) or a dash 
+   (idembibformat=dash), as is the standard setting in 
+   biblatex. The standard is 'idembibformat=idem'.
+ - Option 'idembib' changed: Now 'false' means that 
+   subsequent entries of the same author are given with full 
+   names, not a dash (as was the behaviour up to now). The 
+   standard is 'idembib=true'.
+ - Improved xref support: The child entry does not only scan
+   for the 'volume' field of the parent entry, but prints 
+   also 'location' and 'year', if they differ from the 
+   parent entry.
+   
+v1.2b [2008/11/09]
+ - BUGFIX: With 'xref=true', the first (full) citation did 
+   not show the overall pages of @INBOOK, @INCOLLECTION and 
+   @INPROCEEDINGS entries. This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'nolocation'. If set to 'true', the location 
+   and the publisher are omitted (even if you set 
+   'nopublisher=false'). The default is 'false', i.e. the 
+   location is printed.
+ - The option 'shorthandibid' can now also be used on a 
+   per-entry basis.
+ - Improved xref support: If the 'volume' field of a child 
+   entry is set and the 'volume' field of the corresponding 
+   parent entry is not set, the volume of the child entry 
+   will be printed immediately before the pages.
+
+v1.2a [2008/10/19]
+ - Improved option 'edsuper' which also outputs non-integer 
+   editions (though not as superscript, but rather similar 
+   to a note.) 
+ - The field 'origpublisher' (new in biblatex 0.8) is now
+   also supported.
+ - New option 'origfields' which can take the values 'true' 
+   (standard) and 'false'. With this option, you can now 
+   decide, whether you want to have the fields 
+   'origlocation', 'origpublisher' and 'origyear' to be 
+   printed or not.
+   -> New option 'origfieldsformat=parens|brackets|punct'. 
+      The default is 'punct' which means that the new 
+      punctuation mark '\origfieldspunct' (default: 
+      \addcomma\space) is used  to introduce the reprint 
+      phrase. If you choose 'parens' or 'brackets', the 
+      reprint phrase is put in parentheses or brackets, 
+      respectively, and the \origfieldspunct is ignored.
+ - New option 'shorthandwidth'. With this option you can set 
+   the width of the label in the list of shorthands to any 
+   length (e.g. '3em' or '40pt'). This is useful if you have 
+   very long shorthands.
+   -> New punctuation command '\shorthandpunct' which is 
+      only exerted when you use the option 'shorthandwidth'. 
+      Then it is set to a colon. You can redefine this 
+      punctuation command with \renewcommand.
+   -> New length '\shorthandsep' which is only exerted if 
+      you use the option 'shorthandwidth'. The length 
+      '\shorthandsep' defines the spacing after the label in 
+      the list of shorthands. 
+ - Improved package warnings.
+
+v1.2 [2008/10/09]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8. Note that from 
+   version 1.2 on, biblatex-dw needs at least biblatex 0.8, 
+   so you have to update biblatex as well if you would like 
+   to use biblatex-dw 1.2!
+   -> The new biblatex option 'firstinits' is supported.
+   -> The new macro \bibpagespunct is also supported.
+ - Added option 'xref' which can be set to 'true' or 
+   'false'. If you want to use the crossref functionality 
+   (introduced in biblatex-dw version 1.1f), you now have to 
+   set 'xref=true'. See the documentation for details.
+ - As biblatex 0.8 has changed the handling of the field 
+   'edition', the option 'edsuper' had to be adjusted. See 
+   the documentation of biblatex-dw for details.
+ - Updated the documentation.
+
+v1.1h [2008/09/24]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the options 'edbeforetitle' and 
+   'edbyidem', the idem funcionality did not work. This is 
+   now fixed.
+ - Updated documentation (see especially, if you are using 
+   the crossref functionality) and examples.
+ 
+v1.1g [2008/09/05]
+ - The biblatex package option 'mincrossrefs' is set to '1' 
+   (instead of '2'). The reason is that otherwise entries 
+   that are using the crossref functionality introduced in 
+   biblatex-dw version 1.1f could be incomplete.
+ - If both 'volumes' and 'volume' are present, 'volumes' is 
+   now set before 'volume'.
+
+v1.1f [2008/08/10]
+ - BUGFIX: Corrected wrong punctuation when using 'idembib=
+   false' in conjunction with an editor.
+ - Added crossref functionality (using biblatex's field 
+   'xref'). This works for authortitle-dw as well as 
+   footnote-dw. For further information please have a look 
+   into the package documentation.
+
+v1.1e [2008/06/13]
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'edbeforetitle' caused a problem
+   when used together with the 'idem' functionality
+   (which is the default). This is now fixed. 
+ - Enhanced the 'idem' functionality: If a citation with 
+   shorthand precedes a citation of the same author or 
+   editor without shorthand, the string 'idem' is now 
+   replaced by the author's or editor's name, since this
+   information cannot be gathered from the shorthand 
+   citation and thus could mislead the reader.
+
+v1.1d [2008/06/05]
+ - BUGFIX: The global option 'oldauthor' which was 
+   introduced in version 1.1c caused an erroneous behaviour 
+   when used together with 'idembib=true' (which is the 
+   default). This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'editorstring' which can take the values 
+   'parens', 'brackets' and 'normal'; the default is 
+   'parens'. This option sets the string 'editor' 
+   (abbreviated 'ed.') in parentheses or in brackets, or 
+   just puts the string (with a preceding comma) after the 
+   editor name.
+ - New option 'edbeforetitle' which can take the values 
+   'true' and 'false'; the default is 'false'. When set to 
+   'true', the editor in @INCOLLECTION and @INPROCEEDINGS 
+   entries will be typeset before the booktitle ('... in: 
+   Editor (ed.): Booktitle ...') rather than afterwards 
+   ('... in: Booktitle, ed. by Editor ...').
+ - Small correction in the terse version of the List of 
+   Shorthands concerning the punctuation after authors/
+   editors.
+ - Added missing bibliography drivers for option 'edbyidem'.
+
+v1.1c [2008/05/29]
+ - BUGFIX: With the option 'idem=false', the author of a 
+   first citation who was cited immediately before with 
+   another work lacked the forename.
+ - BUGFIX: The option 'edbyidem=false' produced a 
+   superfluous 'ed. by' string.
+ - BUGFIX: Small punctuation issue with repeated citations 
+   and 'herename'. 
+ - New option 'namefont' which can take the values 
+   'smallcaps', 'italic' and 'bold'. The default is none, 
+   i.e. authors and editors are set in normal font shape. 
+   With 'useprefix=true', this option also affects the 
+   name prefix.
+ - New option 'firstnamefont' which can take the values 
+   'smallcaps', 'italic' and 'bold'. This also affects the 
+   name prefix (with 'useprefix=false') and the name 
+   affix.
+ - The option 'oldauthor' is now also available as global 
+   option in order to disable the feature. If you set 
+   'oldauthor=false' globally, every entry option 
+   'oldauthor=true' is ignored. Thus, you can set the 
+   fontname for every author with global options, 
+   independent of entry options. 
+
+v1.1b [2008/04/13]
+ - BUGFIX: When using \parencite with 'footnote-dw',  
+   additional parentheses (e.g. enclosing the string
+   'editor') were lost; they are now replaced by brackets. 
+ - BUGFIX: In 'footnote-dw', the normal \cite command 
+   always produced a capital letter at the beginning. This
+   is fixed now.
+ - Fixed a small punctuation error in connection with 
+   'herename'.
+ - New command \titleaddonpunct for the punctuation before 
+   titleaddon, booktitleaddon and maintitleaddon. The 
+   default is a period now (not a comma, as before).
+ 
+v1.1a [2008/02/09]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the commands 'mancite' or 
+   'citereset', the 'idem' functionality was not reset. 
+   This is now fixed.
+ - New option 'edsuper'. If set to 'true', the edition is 
+   printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number) 
+   straight ahead of the year. The default is 'false'.
+ - New option 'firstfull' (only in 'authortitle-dw'). If 
+   set to 'true', the first citation is a fullcite. The 
+   default is 'false'.
+ - Option 'citedas' is now also available for 
+   'authortitle-dw' and used when 'firstfull' is set to 
+   'true'.
+   
+v1.1 [2008/02/01]
+ - BUGFIX: The 'citedas' functionality did not work if the 
+   first citation of an entry was introduced by 'idem'.
+ - New option 'terselos' introduced for a terse version of 
+   the list of shorthands (default is 'true').
+ - New option 'herename' introduced to specify if the term 
+   \enquote{here} should prelude the pages of a fullcite 
+   (or, with 'footnote-dw', also the first citation of an 
+   entry) which has a non-empty \texttt{pages}-field.
+ - New option 'nopublisher' introduced to suppress the 
+   publisher. The default value is 'true', but if you want 
+   to have the publisher printed, you now can set the 
+   option 'nopublisher=false'.
+ - If the field 'origlocation' is given, it will be set 
+   together with 'origyear', whereas 'location' and 'year'
+   are appended in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring 
+   'reprint'.
+ - The options 'annotation' and 'library' are now also 
+   usable with the style 'footnote-dw'. The annotations 
+   and library information are only printed in the 
+   bibliography (if there is one), not in the citations or 
+   in the list of shorthands.
+ - Updated documentation.  
+
+v1.01 [2008/01/20]  
+ - BUGFIX: The 'pagetracker' functionality did not work 
+   properly with the style 'footnote-dw'
+ - Excluded ISBN/ISSN and DOI also from entry types 
+   booklet, inproceedings, manual, misc, periodical, 
+   proceedings, and report
+ - Punctuation corrections for the same entry types 
+   concerning the series+number  
+
+v1.0 [2008/01/14]
+ - Initial release
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f5ecd763ea6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+biblatex-dw 2010/03/11 v1.3
+Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+
+************************************************************
+
+Inhalt der Datei LIESMICH
+ 1. Kurzbeschreibung
+ 2. Installationshinweise
+ 3. Benutzung
+ 4. Dokumentation
+ 5. Versionsgeschichte
+ 6. Danksagung
+ 7. Lizenz
+ 8. Dateien
+
+ 
+ 1. Kurzbeschreibung
+ -------------------
+ 
+ biblatex-dw ist eine kleine Sammlung von styles für das 
+ Paket biblatex von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum 
+ Zitieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich und bietet 
+ dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen 
+ von biblatex hinausgehen. biblatex-dw baut vollständig auf 
+ biblatex auf und kann nicht ohne biblatex (mindestens 
+ Version 0.9) benutzt werden!
+ 
+ Anregungen und Verbesserungsvorschläge sind jederzeit 
+ willkommen.
+ 
+ 
+ 2. Installationshinweise
+ ------------------------
+ 
+ Entpacken Sie die zip-Datei in den $LOCALTEXMF-Ordner ihres
+ Systems. Aktualisieren Sie anschließend die 'filename 
+ database' ihrer TeX-Distribution. MiKTeX-Benutzer können 
+ das entweder im Dialog 'Settings' mit der Schaltfläche 
+ 'Refresh FNDB' erledigen oder von der Kommandozeile aus mit 
+ dem Befehl  'initexmf --refresh-fndb'. Wenn Sie eine andere 
+ LaTeX-Distribution verwenden, schlagen Sie bitte in der 
+ Dokumentation Ihrer Distribution nach, wie Sie entsprechend 
+ vorgehen müssen.
+ 
+ 
+ 3. Benutzung
+ ------------
+ 
+ Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard-
+ Stile beim Laden des Pakets biblatex eingebunden:
+ 
+   \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+ bzw.
+   \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+
+ Für zusätzliche Optionen, die von den Stilen bereitgestellt 
+ werden, wird auf die Dokumentation von biblatex-dw sowie 
+ auf die Beispiele 'de-authortitle-dw' und 'de-footnote-dw' 
+ im Ordner 'examples' verwiesen.
+
+
+ 4. Dokumentation
+ ----------------
+
+ Die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw findet 
+ sich in der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.pdf'. Diese Datei ist für 
+ den Bildschirm optimiert. Eine Druckversion lässt sich aber 
+ leicht aus der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.tex' generieren, indem 
+ man die Zeile 
+   \input{biblatex-dw-screen}
+ auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % davorstellt) 
+ und stattdessen die Zeile
+   \input{biblatex-dw-print}
+ nicht auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % vor 
+ dieser Zeile löscht). 
+ Achtung: Möglicherweise sind die Schriften nicht auf Ihrem 
+ System vorhanden. Für die Dokumentation wurden folgende 
+ Schriften verwendet:
+ * Linux Libertine als Brotschrift
+ * Linux Biolinum (Teil des Libertine-Pakets) für 
+   Ãœberschriften 
+ * BeraMono als Festbreitenschrift
+ Diese Schriften sind frei verfügbar. Wenn Sie die Schriften 
+ nicht installiert haben oder nicht installieren wollen, 
+ verwenden Sie einfach andere Schriften. Die entsprechenden 
+ Einstellungen finden Sie in der Datei
+ 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'. 
+ 
+ 
+ 5. Versionsgeschichte
+ ---------------------
+ 
+ siehe Datei CHANGES
+ 
+ 
+ 6. Danksagung
+ -------------
+ 
+ Ohne biblatex gäbe es natürlich auch kein biblatex-dw, 
+ deshalb gebührt mein Dank zuvorderst Philipp Lehman, auch 
+ für die vielen Hilfestellungen und Hinweise, die er mir 
+ immer wieder  gegeben hat. Für Anregungen, Hinweise und
+ das Auffinden und Melden von Fehlern bedanke ich mich 
+ außerdem bei folgenden Personen:
+ * Thomas Demmel            * Simon Flossmann
+ * Till A. Heilmann         * Denis Maier
+ * Rolf Niepraschk          * Jan Hauke Rahm
+ * Ondrej Salvet            * Johann Konrad Schwarz
+ * Matthias Steinbrink      * Philipp Stephani
+ * Bernhard Tempel          * Christofer Zwanzig
+ * Дмитрий Гордеев 
+ 
+  
+ 7. Lizenz
+ ---------
+ 
+ Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project 
+ Public Lizenz, entweder Version 1.3 oder (nach Ihrer Wahl) 
+ jede spaetere Version, verteilt und/oder verändert werden.
+ Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz finden Sie unter
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt. Version 1.3 (oder 
+ eine neuere) ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX
+ Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter.
+ 
+ Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status 'maintained' 
+ (betreut).
+ 
+ Der aktuelle Betreuer dieses Werkes ist Dominik Waßenhoven.
+ 
+ 
+ 8. Dateien
+ ----------
+
+ Dieses Werk (bzw. Paket) besteht aus folgenden Dateien:
+
+ * LIESMICH                 % diese Datei (inkl. Lizenz)
+ * README                   % diese Datei in englisch
+ * CHANGES                  % Versionsgeschichte (englisch) 
+ * standard-dw.bbx
+ * standard-dw.cbx
+ * authortitle-dw.bbx
+ * authortitle-dw.cbx
+ * footnote-dw.bbx
+ * footnote-dw.cbx
+ * english-dw.lbx           % Englische Sprachdatei 
+ * german-dw.lbx            % Deutsche Sprachdatei  
+ * biblatex-dw.pdf          % englische Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw.tex          % englische Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Präambel der Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw-print.tex    % Einstellungen für Druckversion
+ * biblatex-dw-screen.tex   % Einst. für Bildschirmversion  
+ * de-biblatex-dw.pdf       % deutsche Dokumentation  
+ * de-biblatex-dw.tex       % deutsche Dokumentation 
+ * de-authortitle-dw.pdf    % deutsches Beispiel 
+ * de-authortitle-dw.tex    % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-footnote-dw.pdf       % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-footnote-dw.tex       % deutsches Beispiel
+ * en-authortitle-dw.pdf
+ * en-authortitle-dw.tex
+ * en-footnote-dw.pdf
+ * en-footnote-dw.tex
+ * examples-dw.bib
+ * de-examples-dw.bib       % bib-Datei für die Beispiele
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..15d1c2af620
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/README
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+biblatex-dw 2010/03/11 v1.3
+Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+  
+************************************************************
+
+Contents of README
+ 1. Package description
+ 2. Installation
+ 3. Usage notes
+ 4. Documentation
+ 5. History
+ 6. Acknowledgements
+ 7. Licence
+ 8. Files
+
+ 
+ 1. Package description
+ ----------------------
+ 
+ biblatex-dw is a small collection of styles for the 
+ biblatex package. It was designed for citations in the 
+ Humanities and offers some features that are not provided 
+ by the standard biblatex styles. biblatex-dw is dependend 
+ on biblatex (version 0.9 at least) and cannot be used 
+ without it!
+ 
+ Any suggestions concerning this package are highly 
+ appreciated.
+ 
+ 
+ 2. Installation
+ ---------------
+ 
+ Extract the zip archive to the $LOCALTEXMF directory of
+ your system. Refresh your filename database. In MiKTeX, 
+ this is done in the 'Settings' dialog, button 
+ 'Refresh FNDB', or from the command line with the command 
+ 'initexmf --refresh-fndb'. For other LaTeX distributions, 
+ please see its documentation for details.
+ 
+ 
+ 3. Usage notes
+ --------------
+ 
+ The styles are loaded as the biblatex standard styles:
+ 
+   \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+ or
+   \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+
+ If you want to learn more about the styles and their 
+ additional options, please consult the package 
+ documentation as well as the examples 'en-authortitle-dw' 
+ and 'en-footnote-dw' in the 'examples' folder.
+
+
+ 4. Documentation
+ ----------------
+
+ The English documentation of biblatex-dw can be found in 
+ the file 'biblatex-dw.pdf'. This file is intended for 
+ viewing on a computer screen. A printable version can be 
+ compiled from the file 'biblatex-dw.tex'. You only have to 
+ comment the line 
+   \input{biblatex-dw-screen}
+ (i.e. put a % sign in front of it) and uncomment the line 
+   \input{biblatex-dw-print}
+ (i.e. delete the % sign at the beginning of this line).
+ Note: The fonts may not be installed on your system. The 
+ following fonts were used for the documentation:
+ * Linux Libertine in running text
+ * Linux Biolinum (part of the Libertine package) for 
+   headings
+ * BeraMono as typewriter font
+ These fonts are freely available. If you do not have these
+ fonts installed in your system or do not want to install 
+ them, you can easily use another font. The relevant 
+ settings can be found in the file 
+ 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'. 
+
+
+ 5. History
+ ----------
+ 
+ see file CHANGES
+ 
+
+ 6. Acknowledgements
+ -------------------
+ 
+ First of all, I would like to thank Philipp Lehman not only 
+ for his wonderful package 'biblatex', but also for his 
+ helping hand and advice in creating these styles. 
+ Furthermore, for numerous suggestions, contributions and 
+ bug reports I would like to thank the following people:
+ * Thomas Demmel            * Simon Flossmann
+ * Till A. Heilmann         * Denis Maier
+ * Rolf Niepraschk          * Jan Hauke Rahm
+ * Ondrej Salvet            * Johann Konrad Schwarz
+ * Matthias Steinbrink      * Philipp Stephani
+ * Bernhard Tempel          * Christofer Zwanzig
+ * Дмитрий Гордеев 
+ 
+  
+ 7. Licence
+ ----------
+ 
+ This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+ version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later 
+ version. The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt and version 1.3 or 
+ later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version 
+ 2005/12/01 or later.
+ 
+ This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+ 
+ The Current Maintainer of this work is Dominik Waßenhoven.
+ 
+ 
+ 8. Files
+ -------- 
+
+ This work consists of the following files:
+
+ * README                   % this file, including licence
+ * LIESMICH                 % the README in German
+ * CHANGES                  % version history 
+ * standard-dw.bbx
+ * standard-dw.cbx
+ * authortitle-dw.bbx
+ * authortitle-dw.cbx
+ * footnote-dw.bbx
+ * footnote-dw.cbx
+ * english-dw.lbx           % English language mapping file 
+ * german-dw.lbx            % German language mapping file  
+ * biblatex-dw.pdf          % English documentation
+ * biblatex-dw.tex          % English documentation
+ * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Preamble for the documentation
+ * biblatex-dw-print.tex    % Settings for printable version
+ * biblatex-dw-screen.tex   % Settings for screen version   
+ * de-biblatex-dw.pdf       % German documentation  
+ * de-biblatex-dw.tex       % German documentation 
+ * de-authortitle-dw.pdf
+ * de-authortitle-dw.tex
+ * de-footnote-dw.pdf
+ * de-footnote-dw.tex
+ * en-authortitle-dw.pdf    % English example
+ * en-authortitle-dw.tex    % English example
+ * en-footnote-dw.pdf       % English example
+ * en-footnote-dw.tex       % English example
+ * examples-dw.bib          % bib for English examples
+ * de-examples-dw.bib  
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..41387213bcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+% biblatex-dw 
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% This file is the preamble for the documentation of 
+% biblatex-dw (both  the English and the German version)
+
+%%%%% biblatex-dw Version %%%%% version of biblatex-dw %%%%%
+\newcommand{\biblatexdwversion}{1.3}
+\newcommand{\biblatexdwdate}{\printdate{2010-03-11}}
+\newcommand{\screenversion}{}
+\newcommand{\TOC}{}
+\newcommand{\lizenz}{}
+
+%%%%% Kodierung %%%%% Encoding %%%%%
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
+
+%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+
+%%%%% Schriftarten %%%%% Fonts %%%%%
+\usepackage{libertine}%                  Linux Libertine & Biolinum
+\renewcommand{\&}{%
+  \useTextGlyph{fxl}{ampersand.alt}}%    alternatives Ampersand
+\setkomafont{sectioning}{\sffamily}%     Überschriften
+\renewcommand{\headfont}{\normalfont\itshape}% Kolumnentitel
+\usepackage[scaled=0.8]{beramono}%       BeraMono als Typewriter-Schrift
+
+%%%%% Fußnoten %%%%% Footnotes %%%%%
+\deffootnote%
+  {2em}% Einzug des Fußnotentextes; bei dreistelligen Fußnoten evtl. vergrößern
+  {1em}% zusätzlicher Absatzeinzug in der Fußnote
+  {%
+  \makebox[2em]% Raum für Fußnotenzeichen: ebenso groß wie Einzug des FN-Textes
+    [r]% Ausrichtung des Fußnotenzeichens: [r]echts, [l]inks
+    {\fontfamily{fxl}\selectfont% keine Mediävalziffern als Fußnotenmarke
+    \thefootnotemark%
+    \hspace{1em}% Abstand zw. FN-Zeichen und FN-Text
+    }%
+  }
+\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{}% keine Zeile zw. Text und Fußnoten
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+\usepackage{scrpage2}
+\pagestyle{scrheadings}
+\clearscrheadfoot
+
+%%%%% Farben %%%%% Colors %%%%%
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\definecolor{dkblue}{rgb}{0 0.1 0.5}%			dark blue
+\definecolor{dkred}{rgb}{0.85 0 0}%				dark red
+\definecolor{pyellow}{rgb}{1 0.97 0.75}%	pale yellow
+
+%%%%% Kompakte Listen %%%%% Compact lists %%%%%
+\usepackage{enumitem}
+\setlist{noitemsep}
+\setitemize{leftmargin=*,nolistsep}
+\setenumerate{leftmargin=*,nolistsep}
+
+%%%%% Datumsformat %%%%% Date format %%%%%
+\usepackage{isodate}
+\numdate[arabic]% 15. 9. 2008
+\isotwodigitdayfalse% führende Nullen weglassen
+
+%%%%% Spracheinstellungen %%%%% Language settings %%%%%
+\usepackage{babel}
+\newcommand{\versionname}{Version}
+\iflanguage{english}{\renewcommand{\versionname}{version}}{}
+\iflanguage{german}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{}
+\iflanguage{ngerman}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{}
+\iflanguage{english}{\isodate}{}
+
+%%%%% Verschiedene Pakete %%%%% Miscellaneous packages
+\usepackage{microtype}%		optischer Randausgleich
+\usepackage{dtklogos}%		Logos wie \BibTeX
+\usepackage{xspace}
+\usepackage{textcomp}%		Text-Companion-Symbole
+\usepackage{manfnt}%			für das Achtung-Symbol
+\usepackage{marginnote}
+\reversemarginpar
+
+%%%%% Auslassungspunkte %%%%% dots %%%%%
+\let\ldotsOld\ldots
+\renewcommand{\ldots}{\ldotsOld\unkern}
+
+%%%%% Zwischenraum vor und nach \slash %%%%% Spacing around \slash %%%%%
+\let\slashOld\slash
+\renewcommand{\slash}{\kern.05em\slashOld\kern.05em}
+
+%%%%% Anführungszeichen %%%%% quotation marks %%%%%
+\usepackage[babel,german=guillemets]{csquotes}
+\MakeAutoQuote{»}{«}
+
+%%%%% Listings %%%%% listings %%%%%
+\usepackage{listings}
+\lstset{%
+	frame=none,
+%	backgroundcolor=\color{pyellow},
+	language=[LaTeX]TeX,
+	basicstyle=\ttfamily\small,
+	commentstyle=\color{red},
+	keywordstyle=, % LaTeX-Befehle werden nicht fett dargestellt
+	numbers=none,%left/right
+%	numberstyle=\tiny\lnstyle,
+%	numbersep=5pt,
+%	numberblanklines=false,
+	breaklines=true,
+%	caption=\lstname,
+	xleftmargin=5pt,
+	xrightmargin=5pt,
+	escapeinside={(*}{*)},
+	belowskip=\medskipamount,
+	prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$}% übernommen vom scrguide (KOMA-Script)
+}
+
+%%%%% biblatex %%%%% biblatex %%%%%
+\usepackage[%
+  bibtex8=true,
+  bibencoding=inputenc,
+  style=authortitle-dw,
+%  bernhard=true,%
+  journalnumber=date
+]{biblatex}
+\bibliography{examples/examples-dw}
+
+%%%%% Hyperref %%%%% Hyperref %%%%%
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{%
+	colorlinks=true,%
+	linkcolor=dkblue,% Links
+	citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben
+	urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet
+	pdftitle={biblatex-dw},%
+	pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},%
+	pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},%
+	pdfstartview=FitH,%
+%	bookmarksopen=true,%
+%	bookmarksopenlevel=0,%
+	pdfprintscaling=None,%
+}
+
+%%%%% Kurzbefehle %%%%% shortening commands %%%%%
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{#1}}
+\newcommand{\wert}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{\enquote*{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\paket}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\xbx}[1]{\enquote{#1}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\tmp@beschreibung}{}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\beschreibung[2][]{% 
+  \bgroup 
+    \def\tmp@beschreibung{#1}% 
+    \ifx\tmp@beschreibung\@empty 
+      % leerer Fall 
+      \label{#2}%
+	    \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}%
+    \else 
+      % unleerer Fall 
+      \label{#1}%
+	    \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}%
+    \fi 
+  \egroup 
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\newcommand{\bl}{\paket{biblatex}}
+\newcommand{\bldw}{\paket{biblatex-dw}}
+
+% \optlist[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option (Wert)
+% \optset[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option=Wert
+% \opt{Option}
+% \optnur[nur bei xy]{Option}
+% \befehl{Befehlsname}{Definition}{Beschreibung}
+% \befehlleer{Befehlsname}{Beschreibung}
+\newcommand{\optlist}[3][]{\item[\option{#2}](#3) \emph{#1}\hfill%
+  {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\optset}[3][]{\item[\option{#2=#3}] \emph{#1}\\}
+\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\item[\option{#1}]~\hfill%
+  {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#1}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\optnur}[2][]{\item[\option{#2}]\emph{#1}\hfill%
+  {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}}  
+\newcommand{\befehl}[3]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\texttt{#2}\\{#3}}
+\newcommand{\befehlleer}[2]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\emph{(\iflanguage{english}{empty}{leer})}\\{#2}}
+\newcommand{\biblstring}[3]{%
+  \item[\option{#1}]\texttt{#2}\hspace{0.4em}\textbullet\hspace{0.4em}\texttt{#3}}
+
+\newcommand{\achtung}{\marginnote{\footnotesize\dbend}}
+
+\newcounter{beispiel}
+\newcommand{\beispiel}{%
+  \iflanguage{english}{Example}{Beispiel}}
+\newcommand{\seite}[1]{%
+  \iflanguage{english}{page~#1}{Seite~#1}}  
+%%%%% Titelei %%%%% titel page %%%%%
+\author{Dominik Waßenhoven}
+\title{biblatex-dw}
+\date{Version~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}
+
+%%%%% Worttrennungen %%%%% Hyphenation %%%%%
+\usepackage[htt]{hyphenat}
+\hyphenation{
+  Stan-dard-ein-stel-lun-gen
+}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-print.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-print.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0398300f73d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-print.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+% biblatex-dw 
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% This file configures the documentation 
+% of biblatex-dw to be printed
+
+%%%%% KOMA-Script Optionen %%%%% KOMA-Script options %%%%%
+\KOMAoptions{
+	paper=a4
+	,headinclude=true
+%	,fontsize=12pt,DIV=calc
+	,fontsize=11pt,DIV=9
+}
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+\ihead{%
+  \iflanguage{english}%
+    {biblatex-dw documentation}%
+    {Dokumentation von biblatex-dw}}
+\ohead{\versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}% Kopf rechts
+\cfoot{\pagemark}
+
+%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\lizenz}{%
+  \vfill
+  \begin{quote}
+  \small
+  \itshape
+  \iflanguage{english}{%
+    This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash
+    or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public
+    License}. For more details, please have a look at the
+    \enquote{\textls{\texttt{README}}} file.
+   }{%
+    Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen
+    der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder
+    verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei
+    \enquote{\textls{\texttt{LIESMICH}}}.
+   }%
+   \end{quote}
+   \clearpage}
+
+%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%
+\let\TOC\tableofcontents
+
+%%%%% Keine farbigen Links %%%%% No coloured links %%%%%
+\hypersetup{%
+	colorlinks=false,%
+	%linkcolor=dkblue,% Links
+	%citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben
+	%urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet
+	%pdftitle={biblatex-dw},%
+	%pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},%
+	%pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},%
+	%pdfstartview=FitH,%
+%	bookmarksopen=true,%
+%	bookmarksopenlevel=0,%
+	%pdfprintscaling=None,%
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-screen.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-screen.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..69bf2055519
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw-screen.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+% biblatex-dw 
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% This file configures the documentation 
+% of biblatex-dw to be viewed on a screen
+
+%%%%% Satzspiegel %%%%% type area %%%%%
+% übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm
+% adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide
+\usepackage{geometry}
+\geometry{papersize={140mm,210mm},%
+      includehead,includemp,reversemp,marginparwidth=2em,%
+      vmargin={2mm,4mm},hmargin=2mm}%
+      
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+% zu großen Teilen übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm
+% for the most part adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide
+\makeatletter
+    \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\oddsidemargin}%
+    \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{1in}%
+    \setheadwidth[-\@tempdimc]{paper}%
+\makeatother
+\ohead{\smash{%
+  \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}\pagemark\hspace{2mm}}}%
+\ihead[%
+  {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{%
+    \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{%
+      \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}%
+      \makebox[2em][r]%
+        biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}]%
+  {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{%
+     \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{%
+       \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}%
+       \makebox[2em][r]%
+         biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}%
+
+%%%%% Hinweis zur Bildschirmversion %%%%% note on screen version %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\screenversion}{%
+  \begin{quote}
+  \small
+  \color{dkred}
+  \sffamily
+  \iflanguage{english}{%
+    This is the screen version of the \bldw{} documentation.
+    If you would like to have a printable version, please have a look
+    at the \enquote{\textls{\texttt{README}}} file.
+   }{%
+    Dies ist die Bildschirmversion der Dokumentation von \bldw{}.
+    Wenn Sie eine Druckversion haben möchten, schauen Sie bitte in die
+    Datei \enquote{\textls{\texttt{LIESMICH}}}.
+   }%
+   \end{quote}}
+    
+%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\lizenz}{%
+  \vfill
+  \begin{quote}
+  \small
+  \itshape
+  \iflanguage{english}{%
+    This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash
+    or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public
+    License}. For more details, please have a look at the
+    \enquote{\textls{\texttt{README}}} file.
+   }{%
+    Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen
+    der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder
+    verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei
+    \enquote{\textls{\texttt{LIESMICH}}}.
+   }%
+   \end{quote}}
+     
+%%%%% Kein Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% No Table of Contents %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\TOC}{\clearpage}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..38188002c03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..975abc9b163
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/biblatex-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1192 @@
+% biblatex-dw 
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+
+\documentclass[english]{scrartcl}
+\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}%	preamble
+%\input{biblatex-dw-print}%		printable version
+\input{biblatex-dw-screen}%		screen version
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Begin of Document %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} is a small collection of styles for the 
+ \bl{} package. It was designed for citations in the 
+ Humanities and offers some features that are not provided 
+ by the standard \bl{} styles. \bldw{} is dependend 
+ on \bl{}, at least version~0.9 (please note also the requirements
+ of the \bl{} package itself).}
+
+\lizenz
+\screenversion
+\TOC
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\subsection{Installation}
+Extract the zip archive to the \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF} directory of
+ your system.\footnote{If you don't know what that is, have a look at
+\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=tds} or 
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html}.} Refresh your filename database. In 
+MiKTeX, this is done in the \enquote{Settings} dialog, button \enquote{Refresh 
+FNDB}, or from the command line with the command \texttt{initexmf 
+-{}-refresh-fndb}. For other LaTeX distributions, please see its documentation 
+for details. Here is some additional information from the UK \TeX\ FAQ:
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item \href{%
+    http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=install-where}{%
+    Where to install packages}
+	\item \href{%
+	  http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=inst-wlcf}{%
+	  Installing files \enquote{where \LaTeXTeX\ can find them}}
+	\item \href{%
+	  http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=privinst}{%
+	  \enquote{Private} installations of files}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Usage}
+The styles are loaded in the same way as the \bl{} standard styles:
+ 
+\begin{lstlisting} 
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+or
+\begin{lstlisting} 
+\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+The styles are built in a very entangled way which means that the combination of a \bldw\ style with another style is not possible without fail.
+
+ The \bldw\ styles and their additional options are clarified
+ on the next pages. See also the examples \enquote{en-authortitle-dw}
+ and \enquote{en-footnote-dw} in the \texttt{examples} folder.
+
+\subsection{Frequently asked Questions (FAQ)}
+I answered some frequently asked questions concerning \bl{} and \bldw{} and made them
+available online:\\
+\url{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/faq.shtml?en}
+
+\clearpage
+\section{The \xbx{authortitle-dw} style}
+This style is based on the standard \xbx{authortitle} style.
+Besides some changes in punctuation, there are the following differences:
+
+\subsection{Appearance in the bibliography}
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item The\beschreibung{namefont} font shape of authors and editors can be set by the options 
+	      \option{namefont} and\beschreibung{firstnamefont} \option{firstnamefont} which can take the values 
+	      \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. 
+	      If you set \option{useprefix=true}, \option{namefont} affects also 
+	      the name prefix (i.\,e. \enquote{von}, \enquote{de} etc.). If \option{%
+	      useprefix=false} is set (which is the default), the name prefix depends
+	      on the option \option{firstnamefont} which in every case affects the
+	      name suffix (the \enquote{junior} part).
+	\item If\beschreibung{oldauthor} you set the \option{namefont}, but nevertheless need some
+	      of the names being typeset in upright shape (e.g. medieval or
+	      antique authors), you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}} 
+	      or \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor\}} to the respective entry of your
+	      bib file. If you have to switch back to the normal appearance also
+	      for entries with this \texttt{oldauthor} flag, you can set the global
+	      option \option{oldauthor=false} in order to override the entry option.
+	\item The\beschreibung{idemfont} font shape of the \enquote{idem} string (see below) can be set by
+	      the option \option{idemfont} which can take the values 
+	      \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. If you
+	      do not use this option, the \enquote{idem} string is printed in the 
+	      same font shape as indicated by the option \option{namefont}.
+	\item The\beschreibung{ibidemfont} font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string (see below) can be set by
+	      the option \option{ibidemfont} which can take the values 
+	      \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. The 
+	      default value is \wert{normal}.
+  \item The\beschreibung{acronyms}\beschreibung{acronym}
+	      \texttt{shorthands} and journal abbreviations (\texttt{shortjournal})
+        can be set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro} (default for this command:
+        \textsc{smallcaps}). For that, you need to set the global option
+        \option{acronyms} to \wert{true} \emph{and} the entry option \option{acronym=true}.
+        If you want to customize the command \cmd{mkbibacro}, see section
+        \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}} on page~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}.
+	\item The\beschreibung{idembib} option \option{idembib} provides a possibility to substitute
+	      identical authors\slash editors in subsequent entries in the
+	      bibliography by an idem phrase. If set to \wert{false}, the names are
+	      given also in subsequent entries of the same authors\slash editors.
+	      Using \option{idembib=true}, the substitution is enabled. The format
+	      is then set by the option\beschreibung{idembibformat} \option{idembibformat} which can take the
+	      values \wert{idem} to get \enquote{idem} instead of the name(s) and 
+	      \wert{dash} to get a dash (---). In some languages, the idem phrase
+	      is gender-specific. The gender for authors\slash editors has to be
+	      given in the \texttt{gender} field of your bib file (see the \bl{}
+	      documentation for details). The default value for \option{idembib} is
+	      \wert{true}, the default value for \option{idembibformat} is
+	      \wert{idem}.
+	\item When\beschreibung{edbyidem} \texttt{author} and \texttt{editor} are the same in 
+	      \texttt{@incollection} or \texttt{@inbook} entries, the name is not 
+	      repeated but substituted by the string \enquote{idem}. This feature
+	      is controled by the option \option{edbyidem} which can be set to 
+	      \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}.
+	\item Using\beschreibung{pseudoauthor} the entry option \option{pseudoauthor}, the author can be put 
+	      in brackets or omitted. This is useful for editions of works whose authors 
+				are not named, but are known, for instance. If the global option \option{pseudoauthor}
+				is set to \wert{true} (and the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} is used), the author of this 
+				entry is printed. The new commands \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibrightpseudo} 
+				are used to enclose the author. These commands are empty by default. If you would like to enclose
+				the author by brackets, for instance, you have to redefine the commands:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+				If the global option 
+				\option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{false}, the author of entries 
+				with the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} are not printed at 
+				all. The default value for the global option is \wert{true}
+				(i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry 
+				option \option{pseudoauthor}).
+  \item With\beschreibung{nopublisher} default settings, the \texttt{publisher} is not printed, only 
+        \texttt{location} and \texttt{date}. If you would like to have the
+        publisher printed, you have to set the option 
+        \option{nopublisher=false}.
+  \item You\beschreibung{nolocation} can also suppress the location with \option{nolocation=true}. In 
+        this case, also the publisher is omitted (regardless of the setting of
+        \option{nopublisher}). The default setting is \wert{false}.
+  \item The\beschreibung{pagetotal} fields \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn},
+        \texttt{issn} and \texttt{pagetotal} are not printed with the default 
+        settings. They can however be switched on with the options 
+        \option{doi=true}, \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (which is also valid
+				for the fields \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn}) or \option{pagetotal=true},
+        respectively.       
+  \item The\beschreibung{origfields} option \option{origfields} lets you decide, whether you would like 
+        to have the fields \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} and 
+        \texttt{origdate} printed or not; the standard is \wert{true}. If you 
+        use the option and the field \texttt{origlocation} is set, the 
+        \enquote{orig} fields will be printed. In this case, the fields 
+        \texttt{location}, \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{date} are appended 
+        in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring \texttt{reprint}. Note that 
+        the fields \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{origpublisher} are only 
+        printed, if the option \option{nopublisher=false} is given.
+        \achtung Note also that the \texttt{edition} field applies to the 
+        original edition, as reprints are normally not released in more than 
+        one edition, but re-issue a specific edition. If the option 
+        \option{edsuper} is used, the edition is printed as superscript number 
+        ahead of \texttt{origdate}.
+  \item With\beschreibung{origfieldsformat} the option \option{origfieldsformat}, which can take the values 
+        \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{punct}, you can set the 
+        appearance of the reprint details (with \option{origfields=true}). The 
+        values \wert{parens} and \wert{brackets} put them in parentheses or 
+        brackets, respectively. The default is \wert{punct}; this means that 
+        the reprint details are introduced by the punctuation command 
+        \cmd{origfieldspunct}, which is preset to a comma.
+  \item The punctuation before \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon} 
+        and \texttt{maintitleaddon} is controlled by the new command 
+        \cmd{titleaddonpunct}. The default is a period.
+	\item The\beschreibung{edsuper} option \option{edsuper} is introduced. If it is set to \wert{true},
+	      the edition is printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number) 
+	      straight ahead of the year. The default value for this option is 
+	      \wert{false}.\\
+        \achtung Note that this works only, if you have integers in the field
+        \texttt{edition}, and nothing but integers. Information like 
+        \enquote{5th, revised and expanded edition} in the \texttt{edition} 
+        field will be printed as usual, not as a superscript number.
+        Additionally, a warning will appear. If you would like to use the 
+        option \option{edsuper} for one of your documents, you should ensure 
+        that you put only integers into the \texttt{edition} field and use the 
+        field \texttt{note} for more detailed information on editions.
+	\item The\beschreibung{editorstring} option \option{editorstring} is introduced. It can take the values 
+	      \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{normal}; the default is
+	      \wert{parens}. This option sets the string \enquote{editor}
+	      (abbreviated \enquote{ed.}) in parentheses or in brackets. If you set 
+	      the option to \wert{normal}, the editor string is not 
+	      surrounded by parentheses or brackets. Instead, a comma is added after 
+	      the editor's name.
+	      If \option{usetranslator=true} is used, the setting for
+	      \option{editorstring} is also valid for the string
+	      \enquote{translator} (abbreviated \enquote{trans.}).
+	\item If\beschreibung{shortjournal} the option \option{shortjournal} is set to \wert{true}, the
+	      field \texttt{shortjournal} is used instead of \texttt{journaltitle}.
+	      This is useful for journal abbreviations.
+  \item If the \texttt{volume} field is not present for a journal, the 
+        \texttt{year} is \emph{not} printed in parenthesis: \enquote{Journal 
+        name 2008}. But if the \texttt{month} field is set (or the \texttt{date} field 
+				contains a month, e.g. \texttt{2008-03}), the date is
+        separated from the journal title by an additional comma.
+	\item The\beschreibung{journalnumber} option \option{journalnumber} allows you to adjust the position of
+	      a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard}, the behaviour of the
+	      standard styles is used, but you can configure the separator between
+	      \texttt{volume} and \texttt{number} with the new command
+	      \cmd{jourvolnumsep} (default: \cmd{adddot}). With \wert{afteryear} the
+	      number is printed after the \texttt{year} and introduced by the
+	      command \cmd{journumstring}: \enquote{Journal name 28 (2008), no.~2}.
+	      The value \wert{date} assures that the date is printed, even if the 
+	      field \texttt{issue} is given (this is not the case in the standard
+	      styles).
+	      Additionally, \option{journalnumber=date} prints the number before the
+	      date, if the date (at least year and month) is given, but it prints
+	      the number after the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date
+	      contains only a year). See section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on
+	      page~\pageref{journalnumberdate} for details. The default for
+	      \option{journalnumber} is \wert{standard}.	      
+	\item The command \cmd{journumstring} introduces the journal number.
+	      The standard is \wert{, no.~}. The command can be redefined,
+	      e.g.:
+	      \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item The command \cmd{jourvolstring} introduces the journal volume.
+	      The standard is a space. The command can be redefined, e.g.:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{%
+  \addspace vol\adddot\space}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item The fields \texttt{series} and \texttt{number} are put in
+	      parentheses.
+  \item The\beschreibung{series} option \option{series} affects the position of the \texttt{series}
+        field. If set to \wert{afteryear}, the series is printed after the
+        year. This affects the entry types \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@inbook},
+        \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@proceedings},
+        \texttt{@inproceedings} and \texttt{@manual}. The standard value for
+        this option is \wert{standard}.
+  \item The command \cmd{seriespunct} is the punctuation before the 
+        \texttt{series} (of a book etc.). This punctuation is set inside the
+        parentheses. You can set it e.g. to \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} which is
+        common in some fields. The default is empty, i.e.\ the series is 
+        printed right after the opening round bracket.
+  \item The command \cmd{sernumstring} is the punctuation between the 
+        \texttt{series} (of a book etc.) and its \texttt{number}. The default 
+        is \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. You can easily redefine it, e.g.:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+  \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+        This would give \enquote{(Name of Series, vol. N)}.
+  \item The\beschreibung{annotation} option \option{annotation} is introduced. If it is set to
+	      \wert{true}, the field \texttt{annotation} will be printed in 
+	      \textit{\small small italic} typeface at the end of the entry. The
+	      default value for this option is \wert{false}.
+	      You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item The\beschreibung{library} option \option{library} is introduced. If it is set to
+	      \wert{true}, the field \texttt{library} will be printed in 
+	      {\small\sffamily small sans serif} typeface at the end of the entry. 
+	      The default value for this option is \wert{false}.
+	      You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item If both \option{annotation} and \option{library} are set to 
+	      \wert{true}, the contents of the \texttt{annotation} field is placed 
+	      before the contents of the \texttt{library} field.
+	\item In normal \bl{}, the entry type \texttt{@inreference} is an alias for 
+	      \texttt{@incollection} entries. In \bldw{}, this entry type can be used 
+	      for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. The output is similar to 
+	      that of an \texttt{@incollection}, but there are some differences:
+	      \begin{itemize}
+          \item The title is enclosed in quotes.
+          \item The bibliography string \enquote{inrefstring} (standard:
+                \enquote{article}\slash\enquote{art.}) is put in front
+                of the title.
+          \item The location is not printed.
+          \item With a \texttt{volume} present, the output is e.g. \enquote{in:
+                Encyclopedia 2 (1990), p. 120.}
+        \end{itemize}
+        The \texttt{@reference} entry type still is an alias to \texttt{@collection}.
+        Thus, you can use either \texttt{@collection} or \texttt{@reference} for
+        a work of reference.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Appearance in citations}
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the string
+	      \enquote{ibidem} unless the citation is the first one on
+	      the current page.
+	\item In citations of the same author\slash editor as the
+	      immediately preceding citation the name is replaced by 
+	      the string \enquote{idem} unless the citation is the first 
+	      one on the current page. This feature is controled by the
+	      \bl{} option \option{idemtracker} which is set to \wert{constrict}. If
+	      you would like to switch off the idem functionality, you can use 
+	      \option{idemtracker=false}. For more information on the
+	      \option{idemtracker} option see the \bl{} manual.
+	\item If you set the option \option{ibidtracker=false}, immediately
+	      repeated citations are no longer replaced by the string
+	      \enquote{ibidem}, but the \enquote{idem} functionality
+	      is still active as long as you do not set the option
+	      \option{idemtracker=false}.
+	\item The\beschreibung{shorthandibid} option \option{shorthandibid} controls whether
+	      immediately repeated citations with a \texttt{shorthand} 
+	      should also be replaced by the string \enquote{ibidem} or 
+	      not. Possible values are \wert{true} and \wert{false}, 
+	      the default value is \wert{true}. Note that this option has
+	      no effect if you set the option \option{ibidtracker=false}.
+	      Note also that this behaviour can be overridden
+	      for each entry by using \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=true\}} or 
+	      \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=false\}}, respectively.
+	\item With\beschreibung{omiteditor} \option{useeditor=false} and \option{omiteditor=true}, the editor 
+	      in citations will be omitted. The same applies to the short citations in
+				the bibliography, if the xref functionality is in use. With 
+				\option{useeditor=true}, the option \option{omiteditor} has
+				no effect. The standard for this option is \wert{false}.
+	\item With\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations}
+	      the option \option{edstringincitations=true}, the editor and 
+	      translator strings are shown in citations (not only in the full 
+	      citations). The appearance depends on how the option \option{editorstring}
+	      is set. The default value for this option is \wert{true}.
+	\item If you use the \cmd{textcite} command with an entry that
+	      lacks author and editor, \bl{} will give you a warning
+	      and output the entry's key in bold face.
+	\item The\beschreibung{firstfull} option \option{firstfull} delivers a full citation for the first
+	      occurence of an entry. The default value for this option is 
+	      \wert{false}.
+	\item If\beschreibung{citedas} a \texttt{shorthand} is given and the option \option{firstfull}
+	      is set to \wert{true}, the addition \enquote{henceforth 
+	      cited as~\ldots} will be added to the citation. This behaviour can
+	      be influenced by the option \option{citedas}, which can take
+	      the values \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default
+	      is \wert{true}. Note that this behaviour can also be overridden
+	      for each entry by using \texttt{options\,= \{citedas=true\}} or 
+	      \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}, respectively.
+  \item If\beschreibung{herename} you specify pages to a \cmd{fullcite} (or the first citation with
+        the option \option{firstfull}) of an entry which has
+        the field \texttt{pages} defined, the pages of the citation will
+        be preluded by the term \enquote{here}. This behaviour can be
+        influenced by the option \option{herename}, which can take
+        the values \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the standard value
+        is \wert{true}.
+        The term can be redefined in the preamble by the following command,
+        e.g. in order to have a colon after \enquote{here}:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+  herename = {here\addcolon\space}
+}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+  \item With \option{herename=true}, the punctuation before the \enquote{herename}
+        is determined by the command \cmd{herenamepunct}. The default is 
+        \wert{\cmd{add\-comma}\cmd{space}}.
+  \item If\beschreibung{omitpages} you set the option \option{omitpages} to \wert{true}, the page range 
+	      of \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} and
+				\texttt{@inproceedings} entries will be suppressed in full citations. 
+				With \option{herename=true}, the \enquote{herename} will be omitted as
+				well. The standard value for this option is \wert{false}.
+	\item The\beschreibung{firstfullname} option \option{firstfullname=true} offers the possibility to have 
+        authors\slash editors printed with first name and last name for the
+        first citation when using the commands \cmd{citeauthor} or
+        \cmd{textcite}; only when they are cited for the second time, the last 
+        name is printed on its own. This works also with different citations 
+        from the same author such as the full name is only given with the 
+        first citation. It does not matter, if you only use \cmd{citeauthor} 
+        or {textcite} or both. The standard for this option is \wert{false} 
+        (i.e. only the last names are printed).
+	\item If\beschreibung{singletitle} you use the \bl{} option \option{singletitle=true}, the title of 
+	      a cited work is only printed if there is more than one work of the same
+				author. See the biblatex documentation for details.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{List of Shorthands}
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item The\beschreibung{terselos} list of shorthands contains only author (or editor), title and,
+	      if necessary, booktitle or maintitle. This information should be
+	      sufficient in order to find the full bibliographical data in the
+	      bibliography. This feature is controled by the
+	      option \option{terselos} which can be set to \wert{true} or
+	      \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}.
+	\item Using\beschreibung{shorthandwidth} the option \option{shorthandwidth}, you can define the width of
+	      the labels in the list of shorthands. This is especially useful when
+	      you have very long shorthands. The option can take any length 
+	      definition for example \wert{40pt} or \wert{3em}. \achtung If you use 
+	      the option \option{shorthandwidth}, the spacing after the label is 
+	      reduced and a colon is inserted after every label. The punctuation 
+	      mark can be redefined with the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} and the 
+	      spacing is assigned by the new length \cmd{shorthandsep}. The standard 
+	      values (as soon as \option{shorthandwidth} is used) are:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{The \xbx{footnote-dw} style}
+
+This style is similar to \xbx{verbose-inote}. It is based on the 
+\xbx{authortitle-dw} style. Thus, you can use all options defined in 
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}; the only exception is the option \option{firstfull}.
+Besides, there are the following differences between \xbx{footnote-dw} and
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}:
+\medskip 
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item Citations are \emph{only} possible inside footnotes. Citations
+	      which are not inside footnotes will automatically be turned into 
+	      a \cmd{footcite}.
+	\item The first citation will give a full reference, following citations
+	      will only use \texttt{author} and \texttt{shorttitle} (or 
+	      \texttt{title}, if no \texttt{shorttitle} is given) with the
+	      addition \enquote{see n.~\enquote{N}}, where \enquote{N} is
+	      the number of the footnote where the first citation occured.
+	\item The\beschreibung{pageref} option \option{pageref} known from \bl's \xbx{verbose-note} and 
+	      \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} styles is also available. When set to \wert{true},
+	      the page number is added to the footnote number pointing to the full 
+	      citation if it is located on a different page. This option defaults to 
+	      \wert{false}.
+	\item When using \cmd{parencite} outside a footnote, the parentheses 
+	      will be dropped and a \cmd{footcite} will be used instead. Inside
+	      footnotes, the \cmd{parencite} command will work as expected. The
+	      addition \enquote{see n.~\ldots} will be surrounded by brackets
+	      instead of parentheses.
+	\item The \cmd{textcite} command is not defined and will be
+	      replaced by a \cmd{cite} command.	      
+	\item If one or both of the options \option{annotation} and \option{library} 
+	      are set to \wert{true}, the annotations and library information
+	      are only printed in the bibliography (if there is one), but not in the 
+	      first citations and in the list of shorthands.
+	\item The option \option{herename} is valid for full citations 
+	      (\cmd{fullcite}) as well as for the first citation of an entry.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Crossref functionality}
+\label{xreffunctionality}
+\subsection{How it works}
+The\beschreibung{xref} crossref functionality of \bldw{} provides a possibility for
+dependent papers to refer to a parent entry. In order to use it, you
+have to create a parent entry of the type \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection}
+or \texttt{@proceedings}. Each child entry belonging to this parent entry can
+refer to its \BibTeX\ key using the field \texttt{xref}. This works for entries
+of the type \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} and \texttt{@inproceedings}.
+
+Here is a small example:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@collection{parent,
+  editor = {(*\emph{Editor}*)},
+  title = {(*\emph{Book Title}*)},
+  location = {(*\emph{Location}*)},
+  date = {2008}
+}
+@incollection{child,
+  author = {(*\emph{Author}*)},
+  title = {(*\emph{Title of the Contribution}*)},
+  xref = {parent}% reference
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+When an \texttt{@incollection} entry is cited and the option \option{xref} is set
+to \wert{true}, the cited entry takes data of the entry with
+the \BibTeX\ key \texttt{parent}. If it is available, the \texttt{shorthand}
+is used. Otherwise, the fields \texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} and \texttt{title}
+(or \texttt{shorttitle}, if available) are printed. Thus, the reader is
+referred to the corresponding parent entry in the bibliography and in this way
+is provided with all relevant data. 
+
+With multiple child entries, it would be possible to have the data entered only
+once (and thus, also the possibility to have typos would be reduced). But you
+have to keep in mind that you then \emph{always} have to use this crossref 
+mechanism. If you need a document with all data in every single entry, the corresponding
+information (\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) would be missing. It is
+therefore better to enter all relevant data for \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook} 
+and \texttt{@inproceedings} entries including the \BibTeX{} key of the parent
+entry in the \texttt{xref} field. 
+
+The behaviour of the \texttt{xref} field is affected by the package option
+\option{mincrossrefs}, which has the default setting \wert{2}. That means, if only
+one article of a collection is cited, the collection would not be included in the
+bibliography (if it is not cited explicitly) and thus the article would be incomplete.
+For that reason, the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set to \wert{1} when using
+\option{xref=true}.
+
+The default setting does not use this crossref functionality. You can also switch 
+it off with \option{xref=false}. In both cases, the \texttt{xref} field takes effect
+only insofar as the parent entry is only included in the bibliography if at least
+two of his child entries are cited (\option{mincrossrefs=2}). You can of course set
+the value for \option{mincrossrefs} to whatever you want or need.
+
+\achtung{}The reference only works with the field \texttt{xref}. The field \texttt{crossref}
+does \emph{not} work together with this crossref functionality! Instead of simply 
+copying the missing fields from the parent entry into the child entry, as it is
+done in standard \BibTeX\ and its crossref method, the crossref functionality
+presented here uses a special citation which provides the relevant data of the
+parent entry.
+
+\subsection{Peculiarities}
+\subsubsection{\xbx{footnote-dw} specifics}
+The crossref functionality also works with \xbx{footnote-dw}. When using the option
+\option{xref=true}, citing the parent entry for the first time sets a \cmd{label} 
+for the parent entry. It does not matter if the parent entry is cited itself or via 
+a child entry. When a (second) child entry is cited, a short citation of the parent 
+entry is given along with a reference to the footnote of the first citation in which the
+parent entry appeared.
+
+\subsubsection{Multi-volume \enquote{parents}}
+If a parent enry is a multi-volume work, the child entry normally refers to
+a specific volume of the parent entry, not to the entire work. In order to
+take that into account, \bldw{} checks if the \texttt{volume} field is given
+in the child entry. If so, it checks if the parent entry has a \texttt{volume},
+too. Only if the parent entry has no \texttt{volume} specified, the volume of
+the child entry is printed immediately before the pages.%
+\footnote{The reason why it is not checked if the content of both \texttt{volume}
+fields are the same is the following: As soon as the \texttt{volume} field of 
+the parent entry is given, it represents a single volume of a multi-volume work.
+If we now have a child entry with a different \texttt{volume}, it can be considered
+as a fault. At least no scenario came to my mind where a child entry needs a different
+volume as the correpsonding parent entry.} In this case, it will also be checked
+if the data in the \texttt{date} field match. If they don't match (e.g. when the
+multi-volume work was published in several years), the year will be printed
+additionally. Moreover, it will finally be checked if the data in the field
+\texttt{location} (or \texttt{address}) match. If they don't match (e.g. when the
+multi-volume work was published at different places, but the single volume referred to
+by the child entry was published only at one place), the location will be printed
+immediately before the year.
+
+\section{Survey of options}
+\subsection{Global options}
+The value in parentheses shows the default.
+
+	\optlist{acronyms}{false}
+	  Only if set to \wert{true}, the entry option \option{acronym} will be regarded.
+	\optlist{annotation}{false}
+	  The field \texttt{annotation} is printed at the end of the bibliography 
+	  item.
+	\optlist{citedas}{true}
+	  The first citation (in \xbx{authortitle-dw} only if the option 
+	  \option{firstfull} is used) is followed by the string
+	  \enquote{henceforth cited as} whenever a \texttt{shorthand} is given.
+	\optlist{edbyidem}{true}
+	  \enquote{ed. by idem} instead of \enquote{ed. by \emph{Editor}}.
+	\optlist{editorstring}{parens}
+	  Sets the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true} also the
+	  translator string) in parentheses (\wert{parens}) or brackets 
+	  (\wert{brackets}). If set to \wert{normal}, the editor string is
+	  put after the editor's name and preceded by a comma.
+	\optlist{edstringincitations}{true}
+	  In citations, the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true}
+	  also the translator string) is put after the editor's name (and the
+	  translator's name, where appropriate).
+	\optlist{edsuper}{false}
+	  The edition is printed as superscript number straight ahead of the year.
+  \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{firstfull}{false}
+    The first citation is printed with full reference.
+	\optlist{firstfullname}{false}
+	  At the first citation with \cmd{citeauthor} or \cmd{textcite} (with 
+	  footnote-dw: \cmd{citeauthor} only) the full name is printed, at all 
+	  subsequent citations only the last name is printed.
+	\optlist{firstnamefont}{normal}
+	  Specifies the font shape of the first names of authors and editors as well 
+	  as of name affixes and (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{false}) of 
+	  name prefixes. Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, 
+	  \wert{bold} and \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the 
+	  normal font shape is used).
+	\optlist{herename}{true}
+	  Specifies if the term \enquote{here} should prelude the pages of a 
+	  fullcite or of the first citation (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: only with option 
+	  \option{firstfull}) of an entry which has a non-empty \texttt{pages}-field.
+	\optlist{ibidemfont}{normal}
+	  Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string.
+	  Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and 
+	  \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape 
+	  is used).
+	\optlist{idembib}{true}
+	  \enquote{Idem} or \enquote{---} instead of names for the same 
+	  authors\slash editors of subsequent entries in the bibliography.
+	\optlist{idembibformat}{idem}
+	  Only for \option{idembib=true}: With \wert{idem} the names are substituted 
+	  by \enquote{Idem}, with \wert{dash} they are substituted by
+	  a\,---\,well\,---\,dash (\enquote{---}).
+	\optnur[no default]{idemfont}
+	  Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{idem} string.
+	  Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and 
+	  \wert{normal}. If this option is not set, the font shape indicated by the 
+	  option \option{namefont} is used (this is the default behaviour).
+	\optlist{journalnumber}{standard}
+	  Position of a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard} as in the 
+	  standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}, introduced 
+	  by the bibliography string \enquote{number} (\enquote{no.}), and with 
+	  \wert{date} dependent on the date settings (see 
+	  section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on page~\pageref{journalnumberdate}).
+	\optlist{library}{false}
+	  The field \texttt{library} is printed at the end of the bibliography item.
+	\optlist{namefont}{normal}
+	  Specifies the font shape of the last names of authors and editors as well 
+	  as of name prefixes (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{true}).
+	  Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and 
+	  \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape 
+	  is used).
+	\optlist{nopublisher}{true}
+	  The publisher is not printed.
+	\optlist{nolocation}{false}
+	  If set to \wert{true}, the location is not printed. In this case, the 
+	  publisher is omitted, too, even if \option{nopublisher} is set to 
+	  \wert{false}.
+	\optlist{oldauthor}{true}
+	  If set to \wert{false}, the entry option \option{oldauthor} is ignored.
+	\optlist{omiteditor}{false}
+	  If set to \wert{true}, the editor is omitted in citations.
+	\optlist{omitpages}{false}
+	  Specifies if the pages of a fullcite or of the first citation (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: 
+		only with option \option{firstfull}) of an \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook},
+		\texttt{@incollection} or \texttt{@inproceedings} entry will be printed or not.
+	\optlist{origfields}{true}
+	  With \option{origfields=true}, the fields \texttt{origlocation} and 
+	  \texttt{origdate} (as well as \texttt{origpublisher}, if 
+	  \option{nopublisher=false} is given) are printed.
+	\optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct}
+	  Specifies the appearance of the reprint details (with 
+	  \option{origfields=true}): in parentheses, in brackets, or introduced by 
+	  \cmd{origfieldspunct} (preset to a comma).
+	\optlist[\xbx{footnote-dw} only]{pageref}{false}
+	  In addition to the footnote number of the first citation, the page number
+	  is referenced.
+	\optlist{pagetotal}{false}
+	  Whether the field \texttt{pagetotal} is printed or not.
+	\optlist{pseudoauthor}{true}
+	  If set to \wert{false}, the author of entries with entry option 
+		\option{pseudoauthor} are \emph{not} printed.
+	\optlist{series}{standard}
+	  Position of a work's \texttt{series}: with \wert{standard} as in the 
+	  standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}.
+	\optlist{shorthandibid}{true}
+	  Immediately repeated citations of entries with \texttt{shorthand} are 
+	  replaced by \enquote{ibid.}
+	\optnur[no default]{shorthandwidth}
+	  Defines the width of the label in the list of shorthands. Additionally, 
+	  after every label the length \cmd{shorthandsep} (the default is 3pt) and 
+	  the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} (the default is a colon) are executed.
+	\optlist{shortjournal}{false}
+    With \option{shortjournal=true} the field \texttt{shortjournal} is used 
+    instead of \texttt{journaltitle}. If \texttt{shortjournal} is not set,
+    the field \texttt{journaltitle} (and, if available, \texttt{journalsubtitle})
+    is used.
+	\optlist{singletitle}{false}
+    If set to \wert{true}, the title in citations is omitted, unless there is more
+		than one work of the same author. This does not apply to full citations.
+	\optlist{terselos}{true}
+	  A terse version of the list of shorthands is used.
+	\optlist{xref}{false}
+	  The crossref functionality is used and the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set
+		to \wert{1}. See section~\ref{xreffunctionality} on page~\pageref{xreffunctionality} 
+		for details.
+
+\subsection{Entry options}
+	\opt{acronym}
+	  The \texttt{shorthands}, with \option{shortjournal=true} also the abbreviated
+	  journal titles (\texttt{shortjournal}), are set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro},
+	  if the global option \option{acronyms} is set to \wert{true}.
+	\opt{citedas}
+	  The string \enquote{henceforth cited as} in first citations 
+	  (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: with option \option{firstfull} only) of entries 
+	  with a \texttt{shorthand} is enforced (\wert{true}) or suppressed 
+	  (\wert{false}).
+	\opt{oldauthor}
+	  The author is not set in the font shape chosen by \option{namefont},
+	  if the global option \option{oldauthor} is set to \wert{true}.
+	\opt{pseudoauthor}
+	  The author is printed between \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibright\-pseudo},
+	  if the global option \option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{true}. With the
+		global option \option{pseudoauthor=false}, the author of entries with the
+		entry option \option{pseudoauthor=true} are not printed at all.
+	\opt{shorthandibid}
+	  Independent of the global option \option{shorthandibid}, the shorthand of 
+	  this entry is replaced by \enquote{ibidem} (\wert{true}) or is not 
+	  replaced (\wert{false}).
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl}{biblatex} options}
+The following list shows \bl{} options which are set to a specific value by \bldw{}. You can find more information on these options in the \bl{} documentation.
+
+	\optset{autocite}{footnote}
+	  The command \cmd{autocite} is replaced by \cmd{footcite}.
+  \optset{citetracker}{true}
+    The \emph{citation tracker} which checks if a work was already cited before
+    is activated globally.
+	\optset{doi}{false}
+	  Whether the field \texttt{doi} is printed or not.
+	\optset{eprint}{false}
+	  Whether the field \texttt{eprint} is printed or not.
+	\optset{ibidtracker}{constrict}
+	  In immediately repeated citations of the same work, the citation is
+	  replaced by \enquote{ibid.}; text and footnotes are treated separately.
+	\optset{idemtracker}{constrict}
+	  In immediately repeated citations of the same author, the author's name is
+	  replaced by \enquote{idem}; text and footnotes are treated separately.
+	\optset{isbn}{false}
+	  Whether the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn} are printed or not.
+  \optset{loccittracker}{false}
+    The \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker} which checks if the location of a cited
+    work is the same as the location last cited (of the same work) is switched
+    off.
+  \optset{opcittracker}{false}
+    The \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker} which checks if the work is the same as 
+    the one which was last cited by the same author is switched off.
+  \optset{pagetracker}{true}
+    The \emph{page tracker} is switched on; with oneside documents it checks
+    for single pages, with twoside documents it checks for double pages 
+    (spreads). The internal tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage} 
+    use this option.
+
+\subsection{The option \option{journalnumber=date}}
+\label{journalnumberdate}
+Better than wasting a lot of words in trying to describe the option, I will
+rather give some examples which show the \BibTeX\ entry and the corresponding
+output with \option{journalnumber=date}. The examples were provided by 
+Bernhard Tempel; they are in German, but I think the essentials should be 
+clear to the English reader as well.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+  author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+  title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+  journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+  date = {2007},
+  volume = {42},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {13},
+  issue = {Januar--März}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{GMG:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+  author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+  title = {Creativity},
+  journal = {The American Psychologist},
+  date = {1950-09},
+  volume = {5},
+  number = {9},
+  pages = {444--454}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Guilford:1950}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+  author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+  title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+  subtitle = {A critical essay},
+  journal = {Addiction},
+  date = {1997},
+  volume = {92},
+  number = {12},
+  pages = {1619-1637}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Page:1997}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c}
+
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+  author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+  title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+  journal = {Blaubuch},
+  date = {1906},
+  volume = {1},
+  pages = {1726-1730},
+  issue = {4. Quartal},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ewers:1906}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-19}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+  author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+  title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+  journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+  date = {2000},
+  volume = {57},
+  pages = {241-245},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Landolt:2000}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+  author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+  title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+  journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+  number = {23773},
+  pages = {1-3},
+  issue = {Morgenblatt},
+  date = {1930-11-19},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Chapiro:1930}}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+  author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+  title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+  journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+  date = {2007},
+  number = {119},
+  pages = {62},
+  issue = {IV},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Barski:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+  author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+  title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+  subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+  number = {237},
+  pages = {16},
+  date = {2005-10-14},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Essig:2005}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+  author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+  title = {Furor poeticus},
+  subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas},
+  journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+  date = {2007-02},
+  number = {2},
+  url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kluwe:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+  author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+  title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+  subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose	Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+  journal = {Theater heute},
+  date = {2006},
+  number = {5},
+  pages = {14-18},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006}}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+  author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+  title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+  journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+  date = {1922-03-30},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+  author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+  title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+  subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  journal = {Sinn und Form},
+  date = {1960},
+  pages = {363--385},
+  issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Weiss:1960}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+  author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+  title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+  journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+  date = {2006-03-14}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Hofer:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+  author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+  title = {Rose Bernd},
+  journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+  date = {2006-04}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h}
+
+\section{Commands and bibliography strings}
+\subsection{Additional commands}
+The following list shows additional commands introduced by \bldw{}, along with their standard definitions. These commands can be customized with \cmd{renewcommand}.
+
+%	\befehl{}{}{}
+	\befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Font of the field
+	  \texttt{annotation}.}
+	\befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+	  \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\
+	  \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\
+	  \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Final
+	    delimiter between names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's
+	    \cmd{finalnamedelim}.}
+	\befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Punctuation after the author when using 
+	  \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+	\befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between
+	  names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.}
+	\befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Additional delimiter between
+	  first and second name in the bibliography when the scheme 
+	  \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not 
+	  meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.}
+	\befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Punctuation before the author when using 
+	  \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+	\befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Final delimiter between names in 
+	  citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{finalnamedelim}.}
+	\befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Delimiter between names in 
+	  citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.}
+  \befehl{citenamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation after names in
+    citations.}
+	\befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Additional delimiter between
+	  first and second name in citations when the scheme 
+	  \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not 
+	  meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.}
+  \befehl{herenamepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation before the
+    \enquote{herename} (before page indications in fullcites of dependent
+    works).}
+	\befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}%
+	  \cmd{addnbspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the journal number.}
+	\befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Punctuation between journal volume and
+	  journal number (with \option{journumafteryear=false}).}
+	\befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the 
+	  journal volume.}
+	\befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Font of the field
+	  \texttt{library}.}
+	\befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location}
+	  and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=true} is 
+		in use or the publisher is missing.}
+	\befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location}
+	  and \texttt{publisher} when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.}
+  \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of 
+    the reprint, if the options \option{origfields=true} and
+    \option{origfieldsformat=punct} are set.}
+	\befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{publisher}
+	  and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.}
+	\befehlleer{seriespunct}{Punctuation before the \texttt{series}, inside the 
+	  parentheses.}
+	\befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string between the 
+	  \texttt{series} and its \texttt{number}.}
+	\befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Puncutation after a shorthand, if 
+	  \option{shorthandwidth} is used.}
+  \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Length between the 
+    shorthand and its description, if \option{shorthandwidth} is used.}
+  \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of 
+	  \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon} and
+	  \texttt{maintitle\-addon}.}
+
+\subsection{Additional bibliography strings}
+The following list shows the additional bibliography strings introduced by \bldw{}.
+There is always a long and a short version. It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used. 
+        
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+  \biblstring{herename}{here}{here}
+  \biblstring{inrefstring}{article}{art\cmd{adddot}}
+\end{labeling}
+The bibliography strings can be redefined as follows (but note that you cannot 
+define a long and a short version):
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{%
+  herename = {at},
+  inrefstring = {}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+%\subsection{Redefined bibliography strings}
+%The following list shows the bibliography strings which are defined by \bl{}
+%and redefined by \bldw{}. There is always a long and a short version. 
+%It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used. 
+%\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+%%  \biblstring{}{}{}
+  %\biblstring{idem}{idem}{idem}
+  %\biblstring{idemsm}{idem}{idem}
+  %\biblstring{idemsf}{eadem}{eadem}
+  %\biblstring{idemsn}{idem}{idem}
+  %\biblstring{idempm}{eidem}{eidem}
+  %\biblstring{idempf}{eaedem}{eaedem}
+  %\biblstring{idempn}{eadem}{eadem}
+  %\biblstring{idempp}{eidem}{eidem}
+%\end{labeling}
+
+\section{Further hints}
+The following hints are ideas for advanced users to further customize
+the styles beyond the options that \bldw{} provides.
+
+\subsection{Delimiter between names}
+Other than \bl{}, \bldw\ distinguishes between delimiters that are used in
+citations and delimiters that are used in the bibliography. \bl{} has only
+\cmd{multinamedelim} (between multiple authors), \cmd{finalnamedelim} (before
+the last author) and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} (additional character(s) in
+\enquote{Lastname, Firstname\textbar\ and Firstname2 Lastname2}: the \textbar\
+indicates the place for the \cmd{revsdnamedelim}).
+
+\bldw{}, however, has \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bib\-final\-name\-delim}
+and \cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} for the bibliography as well as
+\cmd{citemultinamedelim}, \cmd{citefinalnamedelim} and
+\cmd{citerevsdnamedelim} for the citations. Furthermore, \cmd{multinamedelim}, 
+\cmd{finalnamedelim} and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} are used in the list of
+shorthands. Thus, you can achieve different results. The standard definitions
+are as follows:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=]
+\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{%
+  \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+  \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}
+\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+  \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+  \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\end{lstlisting}
+When you have multiple authors, they are separated by a slash (/) in citations,
+but by comma or (before the last author) by \enquote{and} in the bibliography
+and in the list of shorthands. The definitions for the bibliography and for
+the list of shorthands are the same as with standard \bl{}. You can customize
+these definitions with \cmd{renewcommand*}.
+
+\subsection{Appearance of Shorthands (\cmd{mkbibacro})}
+\label{mkbibacro-anpassen}
+
+In \bl{}, acronyms (e.g. \enquote{\textsc{URL}}) are set in small caps.
+It uses the command \cmd{mkbibacro} which is defined as:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+  \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc}
+    {#1}
+    {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+That means: If small caps are available in the used font, acronyms are set
+in small caps, otherwise in normal shape.
+
+Typographically, it is better (at least in my view) to use upper case letters
+which are slightly letterspaced and scaled down. The letterspacing can be
+done with the package \paket{microtype} (if \paket{pdftex} or \paket{pdf\/latex}
+are used). The scaling is provided by the package \paket{scalefnt}. Thus, the
+command \cmd{mkbibacro} could be redefined in the following way:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage{scalefnt}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+  \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot}
+\end{lstlisting}
+The values for \cmd{textls} and \cmd{scalefont} can of course be customized to
+your desires or needs.
+
+If a \texttt{shorthand} is an acronym (e.g.\ \enquote{EB} for \emph{Encyclopædia Britannica}),
+you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}} to the entry and use the global
+option \option{acronyms=true}. Then the shorthand will be typeset using the
+command \cmd{mkbibacro}. The same applies to abbreviated journals (e.g.
+\enquote{PP} for \emph{Past and Present}) using the field \texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{PP\}}
+and \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c14588cbf85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b8b83dcd99d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/de-biblatex-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1319 @@
+% biblatex-dw 
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2010
+%
+% Diese Datei enthält die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw
+
+\documentclass[ngerman]{scrartcl}
+\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}% 	Präambel
+%\input{biblatex-dw-print}%  		Druckversion
+\input{biblatex-dw-screen}% 		Bildschirmversion
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+%%%%%  Anfang des Dokuments   %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} ist eine kleine Sammlung von Zitierstilen
+ für das Paket \bl{} von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum 
+ Zitieren und Bibliographieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich 
+ und bietet dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen 
+ von \bl{} hinausgehen. \bldw{} baut vollständig auf 
+ \bl{} auf und benötigt mindestens die Version~0.9 (bitte
+ achten Sie auch auf die Mindestanforderungen von \bl{} selbst).}
+
+\lizenz
+\screenversion
+\TOC
+
+\section{Einleitung}
+\subsection{Installation}
+Entpacken Sie die zip-Datei in den \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF}"=Ordner ihres 
+Systems.\footnote{Falls Sie nicht wissen, was das ist, können Sie sich unter 
+\url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/TDS} bzw. 
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html} informieren.} Aktualisieren Sie 
+anschließend die \emph{filename database} ihrer \TeX"=Distribution. 
+MiK\TeX"=Benutzer können das entweder im Dialog \enquote{Settings} mit der 
+Schaltfläche \enquote{Refresh FNDB} erledigen oder von der Kommandozeile aus 
+mit dem Befehl \texttt{initexmf -{}-refresh-fndb}. Wenn Sie eine andere 
+\LaTeX"=Distribution verwenden, schlagen Sie bitte in der Dokumentation Ihrer 
+Distribution nach, wie Sie entsprechend vorgehen müssen. Weitere Informationen:
+\begin{itemize}
+  \small
+	\item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/PaketInstallation}
+	\item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/Verschiedenes#67}
+\end{itemize}
+ 
+\subsection{Benutzung}
+Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard-Stile
+beim Laden des Pakets \bl{} eingebunden:
+
+\begin{lstlisting} 
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+bzw.
+\begin{lstlisting} 
+\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Die Stile sind so konstruiert, dass sie stark miteinander verschränkt sind.
+Das bedeutet, dass die Kombination eines \bldw"=Stiles mit einem anderen Stil
+nicht unbedingt möglich sein wird.
+
+ Zusätzliche Optionen, die von diesen Stilen bereitgestellt 
+ werden, werden im Folgenden erläutert. Außerdem gibt es 
+ die Beispiele \enquote{de-authortitle-dw} und \enquote{de-footnote-dw}
+ im Ordner \texttt{examples}.
+ 
+\subsection{Fragen und Antworten (FAQ)}
+In der deutschen \TeX"=FAQ, die auf den Internetseiten der Deutschen Anwendervereinigung
+\TeX\ e.\,V. (\DANTE) eingesehen werden kann, sind auch einige häufig gestellte Fragen 
+zu \bl{} und \bldw{} beantwortet, abzurufen unter folgender Adresse:\\
+\href{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex}%
+     {http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex}
+
+Außerdem habe ich für \enquote{\DTK}, die Mitgliederzeitschrift
+von \DANTE, einen einführenden Artikel zu \bl{} geschrieben, den ich auch als PDF
+zum Herunterladen anbiete:\\
+\href{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml}%
+     {http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml}
+
+\section{Der Stil \xbx{authortitle-dw}}
+
+Dieser Stil basiert auf dem Standardstil \xbx{authortitle}.
+Neben einigen Änderungen in der Zeichensetzung gibt es folgende Unterschiede:
+
+\subsection{Bibliographie}
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item Die\beschreibung{namefont}
+	      Schriftart der Autoren und Herausgeber kann mit den Optionen% 
+	      \beschreibung{firstnamefont}
+				\option{namefont} und \option{firstnamefont} auf \wert{normal}, 
+	      \wert{smallcaps}
+	      (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder \wert{bold}
+	      (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden.
+	      Wenn die Option \option{useprefix=true} gesetzt ist, wirkt sich
+	      \option{namefont} auch auf das Namenspräfix aus (also \enquote{von},
+	      \enquote{de} etc.).
+	      Mit \option{useprefix=false} (der Standardeinstellung) hängt das 
+	      Namenspräfix von der Option \option{firstnamefont} ab, die in jedem 
+	      Fall
+	      das Namenssuffix (den \enquote{Junior}"=Teil) beeinflusst.
+	\item Wird\beschreibung{oldauthor}
+	      die Option \option{namefont} benutzt, aber es sollen dennoch 
+	      einige Namen nicht in der gewählten Schriftform gesetzt werden (z.\,B.
+	      mittelalterliche oder antike Autoren), kann im entsprechenden
+	      Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}} 
+	      oder \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor\}} gesetzt werden. Sollen diese
+	      mit \texttt{oldauthor} gekennzeichneten Einträge in derselben Schrift
+	      gesetzt werden wie die anderen Einträge, kann man die Eintragsoption
+	      mit der globalen Option \option{oldauthor=false} überschreiben.
+	\item Die\beschreibung{idemfont}
+	      Schriftart von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} (siehe unten) 
+	      kann mit der Option \option{idemfont} auf \wert{normal}, 
+	      \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder 
+	      \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Wird die Option nicht 
+	      verwendet, so wird der Schriftschnitt der Option \option{namefont} 
+	      benutzt. Das ist auch das Standardverhalten.
+	\item Die\beschreibung{ibidemfont}
+	      Schriftart von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} (siehe unten) 
+	      kann mit der Option \option{ibidemfont} auf \wert{normal}, 
+	      \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder 
+	      \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Der Standard ist 
+	      \wert{normal}.	      
+  \item Die\beschreibung{acronyms}
+	      Siglen (\texttt{shorthand} und \texttt{shortjournal}) können mit
+        dem\beschreibung{acronym}
+	      Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt werden (Standard für diesen Befehl:
+        \textsc{smallcaps}). Dazu setzt man die globale Option \option{acronyms=true}
+        \emph{und} im entsprechenden Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld 
+        \texttt{options = \{acronym=true\}}. Zur Anpassung des Befehls
+        \cmd{mkbibacro} siehe auch den Abschnitt \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}}
+        (S.~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}).
+	\item Mit\beschreibung{idembib}
+	      der Option \option{idembib} können aufeinanderfolgende Einträge 
+	      desselben Autors\slash{}Herausgebers in der Bibliographie durch 
+	      \enquote{Ders.} bzw. \enquote{Dies.} oder durch einen langen Strich
+	      (---) ersetzt werden. Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden
+	      die Namen auch in aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen gleicher Autoren\slash
+	      Herausgeber ausgegeben. Mit \option{idembib=true} wird die Ersetzung 
+	      eingeschaltet. Das Format lässt sich dann durch die Option\beschreibung{idembibformat}
+	      \option{idembibformat} einstellen; sie kann die Werte \wert{idem} 
+	      (\enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.}) und \wert{dash} (---) annehmen. 
+	      Das Geschlecht, das bei der Verwendung von \wert{idem} in manchen 
+	      Sprachen 
+	      wichtig ist, wird im Feld  \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die 
+	      \bl"=Dokumentation). Der Standard für \option{idembib} ist 
+	      \wert{true}, 
+	      der Standard für \option{idembibformat} ist \wert{idem}.
+	\item Wenn\beschreibung{edbyidem}
+	      Autor und Herausgeber bei \texttt{@incollection}"~ oder 
+	      \texttt{@inbook}"=Einträgen dieselben sind, werden ihre Namen nicht 
+	      wiederholt, sondern durch \enquote{hg.\,v.\,ders.}, 
+	      \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} etc. ersetzt. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld
+	      \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl{}"=Dokumentation).
+	      Diese Funktion wird durch die Option \option{edbyidem} kontrolliert,
+	      die die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen kann; 
+	      der Standard ist \wert{true}.
+	\item Mit\beschreibung{pseudoauthor}
+	      der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} kann man Autorennamen
+	      in eckige Klammern einschließen oder ganz unterdrücken. Das ist beispielsweise nützlich für
+				Editionen von Werken, deren Autoren nicht genannt werden, aber bekannt
+				sind. Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt 
+				(und die Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} benutzt) wird, dann wird der 
+				Autor ausgegeben. Dabei wird er von den Befehlen \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo}
+				eingerahmt. Diese Befehle sind standardmäßig leer. Wenn man den Autor beispielsweise in eckigen
+				Klammern haben möchte, muss man die Befehle umdefinieren:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+				Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird, werden Autoren
+				von Einträge mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} gar nicht ausgegeben. Der Standard für
+				die globale Option ist \wert{true}.
+  \item In\beschreibung{nopublisher}
+	      der Standardeinstellung wird der Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) nicht
+        ausgegeben, sondern nur Ort (\texttt{location}) und Jahr 
+        (\texttt{date}). Will man den Verlag ausgeben, muss man die Option 
+        \option{nopublisher=false} setzen.
+  \item Mit\beschreibung{nolocation}
+	      \option{nolocation=true} kann man auch die Ausgabe des Ortes 
+        unterdrücken. In diesem Fall wird auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben 
+        (unabhängig von der
+        Einstellung von \option{nopublisher}). Der Standard ist \wert{false}.
+  \item Die Felder \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn},
+	      \texttt{issn}\beschreibung{pagetotal} und \texttt{pagetotal} werden mit den Standardeinstellungen 
+        nicht ausgegeben. Sie können aber mit den Optionen \option{doi=true},
+        \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (gilt auch für \texttt{isrn}
+				und \texttt{issn}) bzw. \option{pagetotal=true} berücksichtigt werden.
+  \item Mit\beschreibung{origfields}
+	      der Option \option{origfields} kann man entscheiden, ob man die 
+        Felder \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} und 
+        \texttt{origdate} ausgeben lassen möchte oder nicht. Der Standard ist 
+        \wert{true}. Wenn die Option genutzt wird und das Feld 
+        \texttt{origlocation} gesetzt ist, werden die \enquote{orig}"=Felder 
+        ausgegeben. In diesem Fall werden dann die Felder \texttt{location}, 
+        \texttt{publisher} und \texttt{date} in Klammern angefügt, eingeleitet 
+        durch den \emph{bibstring} \texttt{reprint} (\enquote{Nachdr.} oder 
+        \enquote{Nachdruck}). Dabei werden die Felder \texttt{publisher} und 
+        \texttt{origpublisher} nur ausgegeben,
+        wenn die Option \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist.
+        \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Edition eines Werks sich immer auf die
+        ursprüngliche Ausgabe bezieht, da Nachdrucke normalerweise nicht in 
+        mehreren Auf"|lagen erscheinen, sondern eine spezifische Auf"|lage 
+        erneut veröffentlichen. Wenn die Option \option{edsuper} benutzt wird,
+        erscheint die Auf"|lage also als hochgestellte Zahl vor 
+        \texttt{origdate}.
+  \item Mit\beschreibung{origfieldsformat}
+	      der Option \option{origfieldsformat}, die die Werte \wert{parens},
+        \wert{brackets} und \wert{punct} annehmen kann, lässt sich einstellen,
+        wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (bei \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben
+        werden. Mit \wert{parens} oder \wert{brackets} werden sie in runden 
+        bzw. eckigen Klammern gesetzt. Der Standard ist \wert{punct}; dabei 
+        werden die Angaben durch das Zeichen \cmd{origfieldspunct} 
+        eingeleitet, das auf ein Komma voreingestellt ist.
+  \item Die Zeichensetzung vor dem Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon},
+        \texttt{booktitleaddon} und \texttt{maintitleaddon}) wird durch den 
+        neuen Befehl \cmd{titleaddonpunct} gesteuert. Der Standard ist ein 
+        Punkt.
+  \item Wird\beschreibung{edsuper}
+	      die Option \option{edsuper} auf \wert{true} gesetzt, erscheint
+        die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) als hochgestellte Zahl (nicht als 
+        Ordnungszahl) direkt vor dem Jahr. Der Standardwert für diese Option 
+        ist \wert{false}.\\
+        \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Option \option{edsuper} nur dann 
+        funktioniert,
+        wenn im Feld \texttt{edition} \emph{nur} eine Zahl steht. Angaben wie 
+        \enquote{5., aktualisierte und ergänzte Aufl.} werden wie sonst auch
+        normal ausgegeben. Gleichzeitig wird in diesem Fall eine Warnung 
+        ausgegeben.
+        Will man von der Option \option{edsuper} Gebrauch machen, wird deshalb 
+        dringend geraten, in das Feld \texttt{edition} weiterhin nur Zahlwerte 
+        einzugeben und für ausführliche Angaben zu Auf"|lagen das Feld 
+        \texttt{note} zu verwenden.
+	\item Die\beschreibung{editorstring}
+	      Option \option{editorstring} kann die Werte \wert{parens}, 
+	      \wert{brackets} und \wert{normal} annehmen; der Standard ist
+	      \wert{parens}. Diese Option setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Herausgeber}
+	      (abgekürzt \enquote{Hrsg.}) in runde Klammern (parens) oder in eckige 
+	      Klammern (brackets). Wenn die Option den Wert \wert{normal} hat, wird 
+	      der Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nicht von Klammern umgeben. Stattdessen
+	      wird er an den Namen des Herausgebers und ein anschließendes Komma
+	      angehängt.
+	      Bei Verwendung von \option{usetranslator=true} trifft die Einstellung
+	      von \option{editorstring} auch auf den Ausdruck \enquote{Übersetzer}
+	      (abgekürzt \enquote{Übers.}) zu.
+	\item Mit\beschreibung{shortjournal}
+	      der Option \option{shortjournal=true} wird statt \texttt{journaltitle}
+	      das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} verwendet. Das ist sehr nützlich für
+	      Zeitschriftensiglen, die man bei Bedarf einsetzen kann.
+  \item Fehlt bei Zeitschriften die Bandangabe (\texttt{volume}), wird die 
+        Jahreszahl \emph{nicht} in Klammern gesetzt: 
+        \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 2008}. Falls dagegen das Feld \texttt{month}
+        gesetzt ist (oder das Feld \texttt{date} den entsprechenden Inhalt aufweist, z.\,B.
+				\texttt{2008-03}), wird das Datum vom Zeitschriftennamen durch ein 
+        zusätzliches Komma getrennt.
+	\item Mit\beschreibung{journalnumber}
+	      der Option \option{journalnumber} lässt sich die Position der
+	      Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) bei Zeitschriften variieren. Mit dem 
+	      Wert \wert{afteryear} wird sie nach dem Jahr
+	      ausgegeben, eingeleitet durch den Befehl \cmd{journumstring} (siehe 
+	      unten), also \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 28 (2008), Nr.~2}. Setzt man
+	      die Option auf \wert{standard}, wird das Standardverhalten 
+	      wiederhergestellt, wobei das Zeichen zwischen \texttt{volume} und 
+	      \texttt{number} mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolnumsep}
+	      (Standard: \cmd{adddot}) einstellbar ist. Zusätzlich gibt es noch
+	      die Möglichkeit, \option{journalnumber} auf \wert{date} zu setzen.
+	      Damit wird gewährleistet, dass das Datum auch dann ausgegeben wird,
+	      wenn das Feld \texttt{issue} definiert ist (das ist in den 
+	      Standard"=Stilen nicht der Fall). Außerdem wird die Heftnummer vor
+	      dem Datum ausgegeben, wenn zumindest Jahr (\texttt{year}) und Monat
+	      (\texttt{month}) angegeben sind (\texttt{date = \{YYYY-MM\}} ist natürlich
+				ebenfalls möglich). Wenn nur das Jahr gegeben ist,
+	      wird die Heftnummer nach dem Jahr ausgegeben. Für nähere Einzelheiten
+	      zur Option \option{journalnumber=date} siehe 
+	      Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf 
+	      Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}. Der Standard für
+	      \option{journalnumber} ist \wert{true}.
+	\item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{journumstring} wird die Heftnummer von
+	      Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist \wert{, Nr.~}. Der 
+	      Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden, 
+	      z.\,B.:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolstring} wird die Bandnummer von
+	      Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist ein Leerzeichen. Der 
+	      Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden, 
+	      z.\,B.:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{%
+  \addspace Jg\adddot\space}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item Die Felder \texttt{series} und \texttt{number} werden von
+        Klammern umschlossen.
+  \item Die\beschreibung{series}
+	      Option \option{series} bestimmt die Position der Reihe (Feld
+        \texttt{series}). Setzt man sie auf \wert{afteryear}, wird die Reihe
+        nach dem Jahr ausgegeben. Das betrifft die Typen \texttt{@book}, 
+        \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection}, 
+        \texttt{@proceedings}, \texttt{@inproceedings} und \texttt{@manual}. 
+        Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{standard}.
+  \item Der Befehl \cmd{seriespunct} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung vor dem 
+        Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}). Das Zeichen wird innerhalb der 
+        Klammer gesetzt. Es kann z.\,B. auf \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} eingestellt 
+        werden, was in manchen Fächern üblich ist. Standardmäßig ist dieser 
+        Befehl leer, d.\,h. der Reihentitel wird direkt nach der öffnenden 
+        runden Klammer gesetzt.
+  \item Der Befehl \cmd{sernumstring} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung zwischen dem 
+        Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}) und der dazugehörigen Nummer (Feld 
+        \texttt{number}). Der Standardwert ist \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. Er kann 
+        leicht angepasst werden, z.\,B.:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+  \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+        Das würde \enquote{(Reihentitel, Bd. N)} ergeben.
+	\item Setzt\beschreibung{annotation}
+	      man die Option \option{annotation} auf
+	      \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{annotation} in 
+	      \textit{\small kleiner kursiver} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags
+	      ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+	      Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item Setzt\beschreibung{library}
+	      man die Option \option{library} auf
+	      \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{library} in 
+	      {\small\sffamily  kleiner serifenloser} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags
+	      ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+	      Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+	\item Werden sowohl \option{annotation} als auch \option{library} auf
+	      \wert{true} gesetzt, so wird der Inhalt des Feldes \texttt{annotation}
+	      vor dem Inhalt des \texttt{library}-Feldes ausgegeben.
+	\item In \bl{} ist der Eintragstyp \texttt{@inreference} ein Alias für
+	      \texttt{@incollection}. In \bldw{} kann dieser Eintragstyp für
+	      Artikel in Nachschlagewerken verwendet werden. Die Ausgabe ist ähnlich
+	      wie bei \texttt{@incollection}, aber es gibt ein paar Unterschiede:
+	      \begin{itemize}
+          \item Der Titel wird in Anführungszeichen gesetzt.
+          \item Der \textit{bibliography string} \enquote{inrefstring} (Standard:
+                \enquote{Artikel}\slash\enquote{Art.}) wird vor dem Titel ausgegeben.
+          \item Der Ort (Feld \texttt{location}) wird nicht ausgegeben.
+          \item Gibt es eine Bandangabe (Feld \texttt{volume}), so sieht die Ausgabe
+                z.\,B. folgendermaßen aus: \enquote{in: Lexikon 2 (1990), S. 120.}
+        \end{itemize}
+        Der Eintragstyp \texttt{@reference} bleibt ein Alias zu \texttt{@collection}.
+        Damit kann also sowohl \texttt{@collection} als auch \texttt{@reference} für
+        Nachschlagewerke (Lexika, Wörterbücher etc.) verwendet werden.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Zitate im Text}
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item Direkt aufeinanderfolgende Zitate werden durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt,
+	      sofern das Zitat nicht das erste der aktuellen Seite ist.
+	\item Folgen zwei unterschiedliche Zitate desselben Autors\slash
+	      Herausgebers direkt aufeinander, wird der Name im zweiten Zitat durch
+	      \enquote{Ders.} oder \enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, sofern das Zitat nicht
+	      das erste der aktuellen Seite ist. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld
+	      \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl"=Dokumentation).
+	      Diese Funktion wird durch die \bl"=Option \option{idemtracker}
+	      kontrolliert, die auf \wert{constrict} gesetzt ist. Wer sie abschalten
+	      möchte, verwendet \option{idemtracker=false}. Für weitere Informationen
+	      zu dieser Option wird auf die \bl"=Dokumentation verwiesen.
+	\item Wenn die \bl{}"=Option \option{ibidtracker} auf \wert{false} gesetzt
+	      wird, werden direkt aufeinanderfolgende Zitate nicht durch
+	      \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt; die \enquote{idem}-Funktionalität bleibt aber
+	      erhalten, solange nicht die Option \option{idemtracker} auf \wert{false}
+	      gesetzt wird.
+	\item Die\beschreibung{shorthandibid}
+	      Option \option{shorthandibid} kontrolliert, ob direkt 
+	      aufeinanderfolgende Zitate mit einer Sigle (\texttt{shorthand})
+	      ebenfalls durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt werden sollen oder nicht.
+	      Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind \wert{true} und \wert{false}, 
+	      der Standard ist \wert{true}. Diese Option hat keinerlei Effekt,
+	      wenn die Option \option{ibidtracker} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird.\\
+	      Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden
+	      mit \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid=""true\}} oder 
+	      \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid""=false\}}. Die globale
+	      Einstellung wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert.	      
+	\item Wenn\beschreibung{omiteditor}
+	      man die Option \option{useeditor} auf \wert{false} setzt, kann man 
+				mit \option{omiteditor=true} erreichen, dass der Herausgeber in 
+				Literaturverweisen unterdrückt wird. Dasselbe gilt auch für Kurzverweise
+				in der Bibliographie, sofern man \option{xref=true} verwendet.
+				Mit \option{useeditor=true} hat die Option \option{omiteditor} keine
+				Auswirkung. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+	\item Mit\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations}
+	      der Option \option{edstringincitations=true} werden Herausgeber
+	      (\texttt{edi\-tor}) und Übersetzer (\texttt{translator}) bei jedem
+	      Literaturverweis mit den entsprechenden Kürzeln versehen, nicht nur
+	      bei Vollzitaten. Das Erscheinungsbild richtet sich dabei nach der
+	      Einstellung der Option \option{editorstring}. Der Standardwert für
+	      diese Option ist \wert{true}.
+	\item Wenn der Befehl \cmd{textcite} mit einem Eintrag benutzt wird, der
+	      weder einen Autor (\texttt{author}) noch einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor})
+	      hat, gibt \bl{} eine Warnung aus und setzt den \BibTeX{}-Key des
+	      Eintrags in fetter Schrift in den Text.
+	\item Mit\beschreibung{firstfull}
+	      der Option \option{firstfull} kann man für das erste Zitat die
+	      volle Literaturangabe ausgeben lassen. Der Standard für diese Option ist
+	      \wert{false}.
+	\item Wenn\beschreibung{citedas}
+	      es eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) gibt, wird bei \option{firstfull=true}
+	      dem Erstzitat der Zusatz \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt.
+	      Dies kann durch die Option \option{citedas} beeinflusst werden.
+	      Sie kann die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen; 
+	      der Standard ist \wert{true}. 
+	      Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden mit
+	      \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=true\}} oder 
+	      \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}. Die globale Einstellung
+	      wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert.
+  \item Wird\beschreibung{herename}
+	      bei einem Vollzitat (\cmd{fullcite} oder Erstzitat mit der Option
+        \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags mit Seitenangaben auch im 
+        Zitat eine Seitenangabe gemacht, wird diese durch \enquote{hier} 
+        eingeleitet. Dies kann durch die Option \option{herename} 
+        beeinflusst werden, die die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false}
+        annehmen kann; der Standard ist \wert{true}.
+        Der Ausdruck kann mit folgendem Befehl in der Präambel umdefiniert 
+        werden, z.\,B. um einen Doppelpunkt nach \enquote{hier} zu haben:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+  herename = {hier\addcolon\space}
+}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+  \item Mit der Option \option{herename=true} wird die Zeichensetzung vor dem
+        \enquote{herename} durch den Befehl \cmd{herenamepunct} bestimmt. Der
+        Standard ist \wert{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}, also ein Komma gefolgt
+        von einem Leerzeichen.
+  \item Mit\beschreibung{omitpages}
+	      der Option \option{omitpages=true} werden die Seitenangaben von
+	      Einträgen der Typen \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} und
+				\texttt{@inproceedings} in Vollzitaten nicht ausgegeben. Nutzt man
+				gleichzeitig die Option \option{herename=true}, wird auch der \enquote{herename} 
+				unterdrückt. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+  \item Mit\beschreibung{firstfullname}
+	      der Option \option{firstfullname=true} hat man die Möglichkeit, beim ersten
+        Zitieren eines Autors\slash Herausgebers mit dem Befehl \cmd{citeauthor}
+        oder mit dem Befehl \cmd{textcite} automatisch den vollen Namen
+        ausgeben zu lassen; erst beim zweiten Zitieren wird dann nur der Nachname
+        ausgegeben. Das funktioniert auch bei unterschiedlichen Literaturverweisen
+        desselben Autors, so dass auch dann der volle Name nur beim ersten Verweis
+        ausgegeben wird. Dabei ist es egal, ob man nur \cmd{citeauthor}, nur \cmd{textcite}
+        oder beide Befehle gemischt einsetzt. Der Standard für diese Option ist
+        \wert{false} (d.\,h., es wird immer nur der Nachname ausgegeben).
+	\item Mit\beschreibung{singletitle}
+	      der \bl"=Option \option{singletitle=true} wird der Titel eines Werkes
+	      nur dann ausgegeben, wenn mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist.
+				Für weitere Informationen sehen Sie bitte in der \bl"=Dokumentation nach.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection[Sigelverzeichnis]{Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}}
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item Das\beschreibung{terselos}
+	      Sigelverzeichnis enthält in der Standardeinstellung lediglich 
+	      Autor (oder Herausgeber), Titel und gegebenenfalls Buchtitel bzw. bei 
+	      mehrbändigen Werken den Gesamttitel. Diese Angaben sollten ausreichen, 
+	      um die vollständigen Daten in der Bibliographie zu finden. Dieses
+	      Verhalten wird durch die Option \option{terselos} gesteuert, die
+	      die Werte \wert{true} und \wert{false} annehmen kann; der Standard
+	      ist \wert{true}.
+	\item Mit\beschreibung{shorthandwidth}
+	      der Option \option{shorthandwidth} kann man die Breite der Label
+	      im Sigelverzeichnis angeben. Das ist vor allem nützlich, wenn man sehr
+	      lange Sigel hat. Die Option kann alle gängigen Längenwerte annehmen,
+	      also beispielsweise \wert{40pt} oder \wert{3em}. \achtung Wenn man die 
+	      Option \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt, wird der Abstand nach dem Label
+	      reduziert und gleichzeitig ein Doppelpunkt nach dem Label angefügt. 
+	      Das Trennzeichen lässt sich durch den Befehl \cmd{shorthandpunct} 
+	      umdefinieren, der Abstand wird durch die neue Länge \cmd{shorthandsep}
+	      festgelegt. Die Standardwerte (sobald \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt
+	      wird) sind:
+				\begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+				\end{lstlisting}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Der Stil \xbx{footnote-dw}}
+
+Dieser Stil ähnelt dem Stil \xbx{verbose-inote}. Er basiert auf
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}, so dass auch alle Optionen, die von \xbx{authortitle-dw} definiert werden, mit \xbx{footnote-dw} benutzt werden können, mit Ausnahme der
+Option \option{firstfull}. Daneben gibt es folgende Unterschiede:
+\medskip
+\begin{itemize}
+	\item Zitate sind \emph{nur} innerhalb von Fußnoten möglich. Zitate
+	      außerhalb von Fußnoten werden automatisch zu einem \cmd{footcite}
+	      geändert.
+	\item Das erste Zitat eines Eintrags gibt die volle Literaturangabe aus, 
+	      alle weiteren Zitate desselben Eintrags werden nur durch den
+	      Autor (\texttt{author}) und den Kurztitel (\texttt{shorttitle}) 
+	      repräsentiert, bzw. durch den Titel (\texttt{title}), falls kein
+	      Kurztitel definiert wurde. Ergänzt wird die Angabe durch den
+	      Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\enquote{N}}, wobei \enquote{N} für
+	      die Nummer der Fußnote steht, in der das Werk zuerst zitiert
+	      wurde.
+	\item Die\beschreibung{pageref}
+	      Option \option{pageref}, die es auch in den \bl"=Stilen 
+	      \xbx{verbose-note} und \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} gibt, ist ebenfalls
+	      verfügbar. Setzt man sie auf \wert{true}, wird die Seite, auf der
+	      das erste Zitat erscheint, zur Fußnotennummer, die auf das erste
+	      Zitat verweist, hinzugefügt, sofern es sich nicht auf derselben
+	      Seite befindet. Der Standard ist \wert{false}.
+	\item Wird \cmd{parencite} außerhalb einer Fußnote benutzt, werden keine
+	      Klammern gesetzt, sondern stattdessen der Befehl \cmd{footcite} 
+	      ausgeführt. Innerhalb einer Fußnote funktioniert \cmd{parencite}
+	      wie erwartet. Der Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\ldots} wird dann von
+	      eckigen Klammern eingeschlossen, nicht von runden Klammern.
+	\item Der Befehl \cmd{textcite} ist nicht definiert und wird durch
+	      \cmd{cite} ersetzt.	      
+	\item Sind die Optionen \option{annotation} und \option{library} (oder eine
+	      von ihnen) auf \wert{true} gesetzt, werden die Anmerkungen 
+	      (\texttt{annotation}) und Bibliotheksinformationen (\texttt{library})
+	      nur in der Bibliographie ausgegeben (falls eine vorhanden ist), nicht
+	      aber im Erstzitat und in der Sigelliste.
+  \item Die Option \option{herename} hat sowohl f"ur Vollzitate 
+        (\cmd{fullcite}) als auch für das jeweilige Erstzitat eines Eintrags
+        Gültigkeit.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Die Querverweis-Funktionalität}
+\label{xreffunctionality}
+\subsection{Funktionsweise}
+Mit\beschreibung{xref} der Querverweis"=Funktionalität von \bldw{} können unselbständige 
+Schriften auf einen \enquote{Eltern"=Eintrag} verweisen.
+Dazu wird in der bib-Datei ein Eltern"=Eintrag des Typs \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection}
+oder \texttt{@proceedings} angelegt. Jeder \enquote{Kind"=Eintrag}, der sich auf diesen
+Eltern"=Eintrag bezieht, verweist mit dem Feld \texttt{xref} auf den \BibTeX"=key des
+Eltern"=Eintrags. Das funktioniert für Einträge der Typen \texttt{@inbook}, 
+\texttt{@incollection} und \texttt{@inproceedings}.
+
+Zur Veranschaulichung ein kleines Beispiel: 
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@collection{parent,
+  editor = {(*\emph{Herausgeber}*)},
+  title = {(*\emph{Buchtitel}*)},
+  location = {(*\emph{Ort}*)},
+  date = {2008}
+}
+@incollection{child,
+  author = {(*\emph{Autor}*)},
+  title = {(*\emph{Titel des Beitrags}*)},
+  xref = {parent}% Verweis
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Wenn nun der \texttt{@incollection}"=Eintrag zitiert und die Option \option{xref} auf
+\wert{true} gesetzt wird, werden automatisch 
+Daten aus dem Eintrag mit dem \BibTeX"=key \texttt{parent} übernommen. Dabei wird das Feld
+\texttt{shorthand} genutzt, sofern es vorhanden ist. Ansonsten werden die Felder 
+\texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} und \texttt{title} (bzw. \texttt{shorttitle},
+falls vorhanden) ausgegeben. Damit wird der Leser auf den entsprechenden Eltern"=Eintrag
+im Literaturverzeichnis verwiesen und hat alle relevanten Daten, ohne dass sie
+mehrfach aufgeführt werden. 
+
+Bei mehreren Kind"=Einträgen wäre es möglich, die Daten nicht mehrfach in die 
+\BibTeX-Datei einzugeben (was auch die Möglichkeit von Tippfehlern reduzieren könnte). 
+Allerdings sollte man sich bewusst sein, dass man dann \emph{immer} auf die
+Verweistechnik angewiesen ist. Sollte man einmal ein Dokument benötigen, in dem
+immer vollständige Einträge vorhanden sein sollen, würden die entsprechenden Daten
+(\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) fehlen. Deshalb ist es besser, auch
+bei \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook} und \texttt{@inproceedings} immer
+die vollständigen Daten einzugeben und auf den Eltern"=Eintrag selbst mit dem
+\texttt{xref}"=Feld zu verweisen. 
+
+Das \texttt{xref}"=Feld beachtet die Paketoption \option{mincrossrefs}, 
+die in der Standardeinstellung auf \wert{2} steht. Das heißt, wenn aus einem
+Sammelband nur ein einziger Beitrag zitiert wird, würde der Sammelband selbst nicht in das
+Literaturverzeichnis aufgenommen werden (es sei denn, er würde selbst explizit 
+zitiert) und die Literaturangabe des Beitrags wäre nicht vollständig. Aus diesem Grund
+wird bei \option{xref=true} die Option \option{mincrossrefs} auf \wert{1} gesetzt.
+
+In der Standardeinstellung (oder mit \option{xref=false}) wird diese Verweistechnik 
+nicht genutzt. Das \texttt{xref}-Feld kommt in diesem Fall nur insoweit zum Tragen, dass ein
+Eltern"=Eintrag nur dann als eigenständiger Eintrag im Literaturverzeichnis aufgeführt 
+wird, wenn mindestens zwei seiner Kind"=Einträge zitiert wurden (\option{mincrossrefs=2}).
+Der Wert für \option{mincrossrefs} lässt sich natürlich individuell anpassen.
+
+\achtung{}Der Verweis funktioniert nur mit dem \texttt{xref}"=Feld. Mit dem Feld 
+\texttt{crossref} arbeitet diese Verweistechnik \emph{nicht} zusammen! Anders als 
+bei der Benutzung des Feldes \texttt{crossref} in herkömmlichem \BibTeX{} 
+werden die fehlenden Felder nämlich nicht einfach in den Kind"=Eintrag importiert. 
+Stattdessen wird ein spezieller Zitierbefehl ausgeführt, der die entsprechenden 
+Daten des Eltern"=Eintrags liefert.
+
+\subsection{Besonderheiten}
+\subsubsection{Verwendung mit \xbx{footnote-dw}}
+Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität arbeitet auch mit dem Stil \xbx{footnote-dw} zusammen. 
+Wenn man die Option \option{xref=true} verwendet, wird beim ersten Zitat des
+Eltern"=Eintrags ein \cmd{label} gesetzt. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob der 
+Eltern"=Eintrag selbst oder durch einen Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wurde. Sobald ein
+(zweiter) Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wird, wird ein Kurzzitat des Eltern"=Eintrags mit einem Verweis 
+auf die Fußnote des ersten Zitats, in dem der Eltern"=Eintrag vorkam, ausgegeben.
+
+\subsubsection{Mehrbändige \enquote{Eltern}}
+Wenn ein Eltern"=Eintrag ein mehrbändiges Werk ist, bezieht sich der 
+Kind"=Eintrag normalerweise auf einen bestimmten Band des Eltern"=Eintrags und
+nicht auf den gesamten Eintrag. Um das zu berücksichtigen, wird zunächst
+überprüft, ob im Kind-Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume} vorhanden ist. Wenn dies
+der Fall ist, wird überprüft, ob im Eltern"=Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume}
+ebenfalls vorhanden ist. Nur wenn das nicht der Fall ist, wird die Bandangabe
+des Kind"=Eintrags unmittelbar vor der Seitenangabe ausgegeben.%
+\footnote{Der Grund, warum auf das bloße Vorhandensein
+des \texttt{volume}"=Feldes und nicht auf die Übereinstimmung geprüft wird, ist folgender:
+Sobald das Feld \texttt{volume} des Eltern"=Eintrags vorhanden ist, handelt es sich
+um einen Einzelband eines mehrbändigen Werkes. Ist nun beim Kind"=Eintrag ein anderer
+Band im \texttt{volume}"=Feld angegeben, wird es sich um einen Fehler handeln. Mir ist
+jedenfalls kein Szenario eingefallen, bei dem ein Kind"=Eintrag eine andere Bandangabe
+erforderte als der dazugehörige Eltern"=Eintrag.} In diesem Fall wird gleichzeitig 
+geprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{date} übereinstimmen. Ist dies nicht der Fall
+(wenn etwa das mehrbändige Werk über mehrere Jahre erschienen ist), wird zusätzlich
+zur Bandangabe auch das Erscheinungsjahr ausgegeben. Außerdem wird dann schließlich
+auch noch überprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{location} (oder \texttt{address})
+übereinstimmen. Tun sie das nicht (etwa wenn das mehrbändige Werk an unterschiedlichen
+Orten erschienen ist, der konkrete Band, auf den sich der Kind"=Eintrag bezieht, aber nur
+in einem Ort), wird vor dem Erscheinungsjahr auch noch der Erscheinungsort ausgegeben.
+
+\section{Die Optionen im Überblick}
+
+\subsection{Globale Optionen}
+Der Wert in Klammern gibt den Standard an.
+	\optlist{acronyms}{false}
+	  Nur wenn man die Option auf \wert{true} setzt, wird die Eintragsoption
+	  \option{acronym} beachtet.
+	\optlist{annotation}{false}
+	  Das Feld \texttt{annotation} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der 
+	  Bibliographie ausgegeben.
+	\optlist{citedas}{true}
+	  Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} wird dem Erstzitat (bei
+	  \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) ein
+	  \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt.
+	\optlist{edbyidem}{true}
+	  \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} statt \enquote{hg.\.v. \emph{Herausgeber}}.
+	\optlist{editorstring}{parens}
+	  Setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true}
+	  auch \enquote{Übers.}) in runde Klammern (\wert{parens}) oder
+	  in eckige Klammern (\wert{brackets}). Mit dem Wert \wert{normal} wird der
+	  Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nach dem Namen des Herausgebers und einem
+	  angehängten Komma angefügt.
+	\optlist{edstringincitations}{true}
+	  Setzt im Zitat den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true}
+	  auch \enquote{Übers.}) hinter den Herausgeber bzw. Übersetzer.
+  \optlist{edsuper}{false}
+    Die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) wird als hochgestellte Zahl direkt vor
+    dem Jahr ausgegeben.
+  \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{firstfull}{false}
+    Beim ersten Zitat wird die volle Literaturangabe ausgegeben.
+	\optlist{firstfullname}{false}
+	  Beim ersten Zitat mit \cmd{citeauthor} oder \cmd{textcite} (bei 
+	  footnote-dw: nur bei \cmd{citeauthor}) wird der volle Name ausgegeben, bei
+	  allen weiteren Zitaten nur der Nachname.
+	\optlist{firstnamefont}{normal}
+	  Legt den Schriftschnitt der Vornamen von Autoren und Editoren fest, ebenso 
+	  von Namensaffixen und (mit der Option \option{useprefix=false}) 
+	  Namenspräfixen.
+	  Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+	  \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+	  der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+	\optlist{herename}{true}
+	  Bei einem Voll- oder Erstzitat (bei \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der 
+	  Option \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags mit Seitenangaben werden die 
+	  Seitenangaben zum Zitat durch ein \enquote{hier} eingeleitet.
+	\optlist{ibidemfont}{normal}
+	  Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} fest.
+	  Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+	  \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+	  der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+	\optlist{idembib}{true}
+	  \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} oder \enquote{---} statt Namen bei 
+	  aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen derselben Autoren\slash Herausgeber in der 
+	  Bibliographie.
+	\optlist{idembibformat}{idem}
+	  Nur bei Benutzung von \option{idembib=true}: Mit \wert{idem} werden die 
+	  Namen durch \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, mit \wert{dash}
+	  durch einen langen Strich (\enquote{---}).
+	\optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{idemfont}
+	  Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} fest.
+	  Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+	  \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal}. Wird die Option nicht gesetzt, so 
+	  wird der Schriftschnitt von der Option \option{namefont} übernommen (das 
+	  ist auch die Voreinstellung).
+	\optlist{journalnumber}{standard}
+	  Position der Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift: bei
+	  \wert{standard} wie in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem
+	  Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}), eingeleitet durch den bibstring \enquote{number}
+	  (\enquote{Nr.}), und bei \wert{date} in Abhängigkeit von den Datumsangaben
+	  (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf
+	  Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}).
+	\optlist{library}{false}
+	  Das Feld \texttt{library} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der Bibliographie 
+	  ausgegeben.
+	\optlist{namefont}{normal}
+	  Legt den Schriftschnitt der Nachnamen von Autoren und Editoren fest, 
+	  ebenso von Namenspräfixen (mit der Option \option{useprefix=true}).
+	  Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+	  \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+	  der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+	\optlist{nopublisher}{true}
+	  Der Verlag wird nicht ausgegeben.
+	\optlist{nolocation}{false}
+	  Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Ort nicht ausgegeben. 
+	  Außerdem wird dann auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben,
+	  selbst wenn \option{nopublisher} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird.
+	\optlist{oldauthor}{true}
+	  Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, wird die Eintragsoption
+	  \option{oldauthor} ignoriert.
+	\optlist{omiteditor}{false}
+	  Unterdrückt die Ausgabe des Herausgebers in Literaturverweisen.
+	\optlist{omitpages}{false}
+	  Legt fest, ob bei einem Voll- oder Erstzitat (bei \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der 
+	  Option \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags der Typen \texttt{@article}, \texttt{@inbook},
+		\texttt{@incollection} oder \texttt{@inproceedings} die Seitenangaben ausgegeben
+		werden oder nicht.
+	\optlist{origfields}{true}
+	  Mit \option{origfields=true} werden die Felder \texttt{origlocation} und 
+	  \texttt{origdate} (sowie \texttt{origpublisher}, wenn
+	  \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist) ausgegeben.
+	\optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct}
+	  Mit dieser Option kann man einstellen, wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (mit 
+	  \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben werden sollen: in runden
+	  (\wert{parens}) oder eckigen (\wert{brackets}) Klammern, oder eingeleitet 
+	  durch \cmd{origfieldspunct} (Voreinstellung ist ein Komma).
+	\optlist[nur \xbx{footnote-dw}]{pageref}{false}
+	  Zusätzlich zur Fußnotennummer wird auch auf die Seitenzahl des ersten Zitats
+	  verwiesen.
+	\optlist{pagetotal}{false}
+	  Das Feld \texttt{pagetotal} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+	\optlist{pseudoauthor}{true}
+	  Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden Autoren von Einträgen mit der Eintragsoption
+		\option{pseudoauthor} \emph{nicht} ausgegeben.
+	\optlist{series}{standard}
+	  Position der Reihe (\texttt{series}) eines Werkes: bei \wert{standard} wie
+	  in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem Jahr 
+	  (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}).
+	\optlist{shorthandibid}{true}
+	  Direkte Folgezitate von Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} werden durch 
+	  \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt.
+	\optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{shorthandwidth}
+	  Legt die Breite der Label im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} 
+	  fest. Gleichzeitig werden nach jedem Label \cmd{shorthandsep}
+	  (standardmäßig 3pt) und \cmd{shorthandpunct} (standardmäßig ein
+	  Doppelpunkt) ausgeführt.
+	\optlist{shortjournal}{false}
+    Mit \option{shortjournal=true} wird das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} statt des 
+    \texttt{journaltitle} ausgewertet. Falls \texttt{shortjournal} nicht 
+    vorhanden ist, wird \texttt{journaltitle} (und ggf. \texttt{journalsubtitle})
+    verwendet.
+	\optlist{singletitle}{false}
+    Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Titel in Literaturverweisen
+		unterdrückt, falls nicht mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist.
+		Vollzitate sind davon ausgenommen.
+	\optlist{terselos}{true}
+	  Es wird ein knapperes Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} 
+	  ausgegeben.
+	\optlist{xref}{false}
+	  Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität wird verwendet und die Option \option{mincrossrefs}
+		auf den Wert \wert{1} gesetzt. Genaueres dazu findet sich 
+	  im Abschnitt~\ref{xreffunctionality} auf Seite~\pageref{xreffunctionality}.
+
+\subsection{Optionen für einzelne Einträge}
+	\opt{acronym}
+	  Die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand}, bei \option{shortjournal=true} auch 
+	  \texttt{shortjournal}) werden mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt,
+	  sofern die globale Option \option{acronyms} aktiviert ist.
+	\opt{citedas}
+	  Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} nach dem Erstzitat (bei 
+	  \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) das
+	  angefügte \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} erzwingen (\wert{true})
+	  bzw. unterdrücken (\wert{false}).
+	\opt{oldauthor}
+	  Der Autor wird nicht in dem mit \option{namefont} gewählten Schriftschnitt 
+	  gesetzt, sofern die globale Option \option{oldauthor} aktiviert ist.
+	\opt{pseudoauthor}
+	  Der Autor wird von \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo} umgeben, 
+		sofern die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt ist.
+		Bei globaler Option \option{pseudoauthor=false} wird der Autor von Einträgen
+		mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor=true} gar nicht ausgegeben.
+	\opt{shorthandibid}
+	  Bei Einträgen mit Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) wird~-- unabhängig von der 
+	  globalen Option \option{shorthandibid}~-- bei direkt aufeinanderfolgenden 
+	  Wiederholungszitaten die Sigle durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt (\wert{true})
+	  bzw. nicht ersetzt (\wert{false}).
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl"=}{biblatex-}Optionen}
+Im Folgenden werden Optionen aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung gestellt und von \bldw{} lediglich auf einen bestimmten Wert voreingestellt werden. Nähere Informationen zu diesen Optionen sind der \bl"=Dokumentation zu entnehmen.
+
+	\optset{autocite}{footnote}
+	  Für den Befehl \cmd{autocite} wird ein \cmd{footcite} ausgeführt.
+  \optset{citetracker}{true}
+    Der \emph{citation tracker}, der überprüft, ob ein Werk bereits zitiert
+    wurde, wird global aktiviert.
+	\optset{doi}{false}
+	  Das Feld \texttt{doi} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+	\optset{eprint}{false}
+	  Das Feld \texttt{eprint} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+	\optset{ibidtracker}{constrict}
+	  Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Werks wird \enquote{ebd.} ausgegeben.
+	  Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig voneinander behandelt.
+	\optset{idemtracker}{constrict}
+	  Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Autors wird dessen Name durch 
+	  \enquote{ders.} ersetzt. Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig
+	  voneinander behandelt.
+	\optset{isbn}{false}
+	  Die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} und \texttt{issn} werden
+		ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+  \optset{loccittracker}{false}
+    Der \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob die Stelle eines
+    Werks dieselbe ist wie die des zuletzt von diesem Autor zitierten Werks,
+    wird ausgeschaltet.  
+  \optset{opcittracker}{false}
+    Der \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob das Werk dasselbe
+    ist wie das letzte von diesem Autor zitierte Werk, wird ausgeschaltet.
+  \optset{pagetracker}{true}
+    Der \emph{page tracker} wird eingeschaltet; bei einseitigen Dokumenten
+    prüft er auf einzelne Seiten, bei zweiseitigen Dokumenten auf 
+    Doppelseiten. Die internen Tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} und \cmd{ifsamepage} 
+    machen Gebrauch von dieser Einstellung.
+%  \optset[footnote-dw]{uniquename}{false}
+%    Es werden immer Vor- und Nachnamen ausgegeben.
+
+\subsection{Die Option \option{journalnumber=date}}
+\label{journalnumberdate}
+Anstatt viele Worte zu verlieren, um zu beschreiben, wie die Option 
+funktioniert, werden im Folgenden einfach entsprechende Beispiele
+gezeigt. Dabei erscheint zunächst immer der \BibTeX"=Eintrag und darunter die
+entsprechende Ausgabe mit \option{journalnumber=date}. Die Beispiele wurden
+von Bernhard Tempel zusammengestellt.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+  author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+  title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+  journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+  date = {2007},
+  volume = {42},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {13},
+  issue = {Januar--März}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{GMG:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+  author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+  title = {Creativity},
+  journal = {The American Psychologist},
+  date = {1950-09},
+  volume = {5},
+  number = {9},
+  pages = {444--454}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Guilford:1950}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+  author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+  title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+  subtitle = {A critical essay},
+  journal = {Addiction},
+  date = {1997},
+  volume = {92},
+  number = {12},
+  pages = {1619-1637}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Page:1997}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c}
+
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+  author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+  title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+  journal = {Blaubuch},
+  date = {1906},
+  volume = {1},
+  pages = {1726-1730},
+  issue = {4. Quartal},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ewers:1906}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-13}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+  author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+  title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+  journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+  date = {2000},
+  volume = {57},
+  pages = {241-245},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Landolt:2000}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+  author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+  title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+  journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+  number = {23773},
+  pages = {1-3},
+  issue = {Morgenblatt},
+  date = {1930-11-19},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Chapiro:1930}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+  author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+  title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+  journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+  date = {2007},
+  number = {119},
+  pages = {62},
+  issue = {IV},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Barski:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+  author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+  title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+  subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+  number = {237},
+  pages = {16},
+  date = {2005-10-14},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Essig:2005}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+  author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+  title = {Furor poeticus},
+  subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas},
+  journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+  date = {2007-02},
+  number = {2},
+  url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kluwe:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+  author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+  title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+  subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose	Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+  journal = {Theater heute},
+  date = {2006},
+  number = {5},
+  pages = {14-18},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+  author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+  title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+  journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+  date = {1922-03-30},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+  author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+  title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+  subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  journal = {Sinn und Form},
+  date = {1960},
+  pages = {363--385},
+  issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Weiss:1960}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+  author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+  title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+  journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+  date = {2006-03-14}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Hofer:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+  author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+  title = {Rose Bernd},
+  journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+  date = {2006-04}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h}
+
+\section{Befehle und Begriffe}
+\subsection{Zusätzliche Befehle}
+Im Folgenden werden die von \bldw{} zur Verfügung gestellten Befehle mit ihrer Standarddefinition aufgelistet. Diese Befehle können mit \cmd{renewcommand*} angepasst werden.
+
+%	\befehl{}{}{}
+	\befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Schrift des Feldes
+	  \texttt{annotation}.}
+	\befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+	  \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\
+	  \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\
+	  \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer
+	  zwischen dem vorletzten und letzten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der
+	  Bibliographie. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.}
+	\befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Zeichen vor dem Autor bei Benutzung von 
+	  \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+	\befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer
+	  zwischen Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie. Vergleiche
+	  \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.}
+	\befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen dem 
+	  ersten und zweiten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie beim
+	  Schema \enquote{Nachname, Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit 
+	  nicht gemeint! Vergleiche \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.}
+	\befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Zeichen nach dem Autor bei Benutzung von 
+	  \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+	\befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen dem vorletzten 
+	  und letzten Namen in Zitaten. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.}
+	\befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen Namen in Zitaten.
+	  Vergleiche \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.}
+  \befehl{citenamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen nach Namen in 
+    Zitaten.}
+	\befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen
+	  dem ersten und zweiten Namen in Zitaten beim Schema \enquote{Nachname,
+	  Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit nicht gemeint! Vergleiche
+	  \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.}
+  \befehl{herenamepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem 
+    \enquote{herename} (vor Seitenangaben in Vollzitaten von unselbständigen
+    Werken).}
+	\befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}%
+	  \cmd{addnbspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor der Heftnummer 
+	  (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift.}
+	\befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Zeichen zwischen Band und Heftnummer
+	  einer Zeitschrift (bei \option{journumafteryear=false}).}
+	\befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor dem
+	  Jahrgangsband (\texttt{volume}) einer Zeitschrift.}
+	\befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Schrift des Feldes
+	  \texttt{library}.}
+	\befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location})
+	  und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=true} oder
+		wenn kein Verlag angegeben wurde.}
+	\befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location})
+	  und Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.}
+  \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem
+    Nachdruck bei \option{origfields=true} und
+    \option{origfieldsformat=punct}.}
+	\befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Verlag (\texttt{publisher})
+	  und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.}
+	\befehlleer{seriespunct}{Zeichen vor dem Reihentitel (\texttt{series}),
+	  innerhalb der Klammer.}
+	\befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff zwischen dem
+	  Reihentitel (\texttt{series}) und der Nummer (\texttt{number}).}
+	\befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Zeichen nach einer Sigle, wenn
+	  \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.}
+  \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Länge zwischen Sigle und
+    Siglenbeschreibung, wenn \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.}
+  \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem
+	  Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon},
+	  \texttt{maintitleaddon}).}
+
+\subsection{Zusätzliche Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}}
+In dieser Liste werden die von \bldw{} zusätzlich definierten Begriffe 
+aufgeführt. Es gibt sie jeweils in einer langen und einer abgekürzten Form. 
+Welche Form verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab. 
+        
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+  \biblstring{herename}{hier}{hier}
+  \biblstring{idemdat}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{idemdatsf}{derselben}{ders\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{idemdatsm}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{idemdatsn}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{idemdatpf}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{idemdatpm}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{idemdatpn}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{idemdatpp}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{inrefstring}{Artikel\cmd{addspace}}{Art\cmd{adddotspace}}
+
+\end{labeling}
+Die \emph{bibliography strings} lassen sich folgendermaßen umdefinieren, wobei 
+nicht zwischen einer langen und einer kurzen Form unterschieden werden kann:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+  idemdat = {idem},
+  idemdatsf = {eadem}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\subsection{Geänderte Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}}
+In dieser Liste werden die Begriffe aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung
+gestellt und von \bldw{} umdefiniert werden. Ob die lange oder die abgekürzte
+Variante verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab. 
+
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+%  \biblstring{}{}{}
+  \biblstring{seenote}{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{reprint}{Nachdruck}{Ndr\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{reprintof}{Nachdruck von}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace} v\cmd{adddot}}
+  \biblstring{reprintas}{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddotspace} u\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace}\\%
+                         d\cmd{adddot}\textbackslash{} Titel}
+  \biblstring{byauthor}{von}{v\cmd{adddot}}
+\end{labeling}
+Auch die übrigen zusammengesetzten Abkürzungen (wie oben \enquote{Ndr. v.}) 
+verwenden den Befehl \cmd{addabthinspace}, also einen kurzen Abstand zwischen
+den einzelnen Teilen der Abkürzung. Die genaue Bedeutung dieses Befehls wird
+in der \bl"=Dokumentation erklärt.
+
+\section{Weitere Hinweise}
+\label{weitere-anpassungen}
+Die folgenden Hinweise verstehen sich als Anregung für fortgeschrittene Anwender
+und beschreiben weitere Anpassungen, die von den Optionen des Pakets \bldw{}
+nicht abgedeckt werden.
+
+\subsection{Trennzeichen zwischen Namen}
+Anders als \bl{} unterscheidet \bldw{} zwischen den Trennzeichen, die in 
+Zitaten verwendet werden, und denen in der Bibliographie. Bei \bl{} gibt es 
+lediglich \cmd{multinamedelim} (zwischen mehreren Autoren), 
+\cmd{finalnamedelim} (vor dem letzten Autor) und \cmd{revsdnamedelim}
+(zusätzliches Zeichen bei \enquote{Nachname, Vorname\textbar\ und Vorname2 
+Nachname2}: dort wo \textbar\ steht, würde \cmd{revsdnamedelim} eingefügt
+werden).
+
+\bldw{} hingegen hat \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bibfinalnamedelim} und
+\cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} für die Bibliographie sowie \cmd{citemultinamedelim}, 
+\cmd{citefinalnamedelim} und \cmd{citerevsdnamedelim} für die Literaturverweise
+im Text. Außerdem werden \cmd{multinamedelim}, \cmd{finalnamedelim} und
+\cmd{revsdnamedelim} im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} verwendet.
+Damit lassen sich unterschiedliche Darstellungsweisen festlegen. Die
+Standarddefinitionen sehen folgendermaßen aus:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=]
+\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{%
+  \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+  \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}
+\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+  \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+  \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Damit wird bei mehreren Autoren im Text ein Schrägstrich (/) ausgegeben, im
+Literaturverzeichnis und im Sigelverzeichnis dagegen Kommata bzw. (vor dem
+letzten Namen) ein \enquote{und}. Die Definitionen für das Literatur- und das 
+Sigelverzeichnis stimmen also mit den Standarddefinitionen von \bl{} überein.
+Mit \cmd{renewcommand*} lassen sich diese Befehle nach eigenen Bedürfnissen
+anpassen.
+
+\subsection{Darstellung von Siglen (\cmd{mkbibacro})}
+\label{mkbibacro-anpassen}
+In \bl{} werden Akronyme (also Abkürzungen) wie z.\,B. \enquote{\textsc{URL}} in 
+Kapitälchen gesetzt. Dazu wird der Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} benutzt, der standardmäßig
+folgendermaßen definiert ist:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+  \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc}
+    {#1}
+    {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Das bedeutet: Falls Kapitälchen in der verwendeten Schrift vorhanden sind, werden
+Akronyme in Kapitälchen gesetzt, ansonsten normal. 
+
+Vom typografischen Standpunkt aus (zumindest von meinem) ist es aber besser, für
+Akronyme Großbuchstaben zu verwenden, die leicht gesperrt werden und etwas kleiner
+sind als gewöhnliche Großbuchstaben. Die Sperrung lässt sich (bei Verwendung von 
+\paket{pdftex} bzw. \paket{pdf"|latex}) mit dem Paket \paket{microtype} einstellen. Die 
+Verkleinerung lässt sich mit dem Paket \paket{scalefnt} erreichen. Somit könnte man
+den Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} folgendermaßen anpassen:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage{scalefnt}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+  \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Die Werte für \cmd{textls} und \cmd{scalefont} lassen sich natürlich den eigenen 
+Vorstellungen oder Anforderungen anpassen.
+
+Wenn eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) ein Akronym ist (z.\,B. \enquote{LMA} für
+das \emph{Lexikon des Mittelalters}), kann man dem Eintrag 
+\texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym= true\}} hinzufügen und die globale Option
+\option{acronyms=true} nutzen. Dann wird die Sigle mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro}
+gesetzt. Dasselbe gilt für Abkürzungen von Zeitschriften (z.\,B. \enquote{HZ} für
+die \emph{Historische Zeitschrift}); hier benutzt man die Felder
+\texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{HZ\}} und \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2d26e139370
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bc9dc455fe5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+  style=authortitle-dw,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+  %acronyms=true,
+  annotation=true,
+  %citedas=false,
+  %edbyidem=false,
+  %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+  %edstringincitations=false,
+  %edsuper=true,
+  %firstfull=true,
+  %firstfullname=true,
+  %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %herename=false,
+  %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %idembib=false,
+  %idembibformat=dash,
+  %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+  library=true,
+  %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %nolocation=true,
+  %nopublisher=false,
+  %oldauthor=false,
+  %omiteditor=true,
+  %omitpages=true,
+  %origfields=false,
+  %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+  %pagetotal=true,
+  %pseudoauthor=false,
+  %series=afteryear,
+  %shorthandibid=false,
+  %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+  %shortjournal=true,
+  %terselos=false,
+  %xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+  %autocite=plain,
+	%citetracker=false,
+	%doi=true,
+	%eprint=true,
+	%ibidtracker=false,
+  %idemtracker=false,
+	%isbn=true,
+	%pagetracker=false,
+  hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{de-examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+
+%\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+%\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Der Stil \texttt{authortitle-dw}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.
+
+\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{kant:ku}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-examples-dw.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-examples-dw.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14f4913c863
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-examples-dw.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,790 @@
+@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " }
+
+@STRING{cup = {Cambridge University Press}}
+
+@STRING{dtv = {Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag}}
+
+@ARTICLE{angenendt,
+  author = {Angenendt, Arnold},
+  title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde},
+  shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+  volume = {97},
+  date = {2002},
+  pages = {431--456, 791--823},
+  annotation = {Ein deutschsprachiger Aufsatz in einer französischen Zeitschrift.
+	Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte
+  die Felder \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+  journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
+  shortjournal = {RHE},
+  library = {Im Feld \texttt{library} ist Platz für Bibliotheksinformationen.},
+  options = {acronym=true}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:rhetoric,
+  author = {Aristoteles},
+  title = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith
+	Cope},
+  shorttitle = {Rhetoric},
+  publisher = cup,
+  date = {1877},
+  editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+  annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+	\texttt{editor} und \texttt{commentator} sowie \texttt{volumes},
+	\texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.},
+  commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  indextitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The},
+  keywords = {primary},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle},
+  volumes = {3}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:anima,
+  author = {Aristoteles},
+  title = {De Anima},
+  publisher = cup,
+  date = {1907},
+  editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber
+	(\texttt{editor}).},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  keywords = {primary},
+  location = {Cambridge},
+  options = {oldauthor}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:poetics,
+  author = {Aristoteles},
+  title = {Poetics},
+  shorttitle = {Poetics},
+  publisher = {Clarendon Press},
+  date = {1968},
+  editor = {Lucas, D. W.},
+  series = {Clarendon Aristotle},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber
+	(\texttt{editor}) sowie einem \texttt{series}-Feld.},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  keywords = {primary},
+  location = {Oxford},
+  options = {oldauthor}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:physics,
+  author = {Aristoteles},
+  title = {Physics},
+  shorttitle = {Physics},
+  publisher = {G. P. Putnam},
+  date = {1929},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit einem \texttt{translator}-Feld.},
+  hyphenation = {american},
+  keywords = {primary},
+  location = {New York},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/bland,
+  author = {Averroes},
+  title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect
+	by Ibn Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni},
+  shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction},
+  publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America},
+  date = {1982},
+  editor = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+  series = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought},
+  number = {7},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und Reihennummer
+	(\texttt{number}).},
+  hyphenation = {american},
+  indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The},
+  keywords = {primary},
+  location = {New York},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  translator = {Bland, Kalman P.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/hannes,
+  author = {Averroes},
+  title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit
+	der Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}},
+  shorttitle = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
+  date = {1892},
+  editor = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+  annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+	\texttt{editor}, \texttt{translator} und \texttt{commentator}; ebenso
+	die Felder \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle},
+	und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+  annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indexsorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  keywords = {primary},
+  location = {Halle an der Saale},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  translator = {Hannes, Ludwig}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/hercz,
+  author = {Averroes},
+  title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects
+	mit dem Menschen},
+  shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen},
+  subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von
+	Samuel Ibn Tibbon},
+  publisher = {S.~Hermann},
+  date = {1869},
+  editor = {Hercz, J.},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+	\texttt{editor} und \texttt{translator} sowie die Felder \texttt{indextitle}
+	und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indexsorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction},
+  indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction},
+  keywords = {primary},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  translator = {Hercz, J.}
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{brandt,
+  author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann},
+  title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis
+	1448},
+  shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder},
+  pages = {884--917},
+  editor = {Ferdinand Seibt},
+  booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter},
+  publisher = {Klett-Cotta},
+  date = {1987},
+  series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte},
+  number = {2},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{incollection}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und
+	Nummer (\texttt{number}). Man beachte das Format des Namens und vergleiche
+	die \texttt{useprefix}-Option im Feld \texttt{options}. Man beachte
+	außerdem die Felder \texttt{indextitle} und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indexsorttitle = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+  indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448,
+	Die},
+  location = {Stuttgart},
+  options = {useprefix=false}
+}
+
+@BOOK{cicero,
+  author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius},
+  title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter},
+  shorttitle = {De natura deorum},
+  publisher = {Reclam},
+  date = {1995},
+  editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+  afterword = {Thraede, Klaus},
+  annotation = {Eine zweisprachige Edition von Ciceros \emph{De natura deorum} mit
+	deutscher Übersetzung. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{language}-Felds
+	in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, die Verknüpfung der Felder \texttt{editor}
+	und \texttt{translator} sowie das Feld \texttt{afterword}.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indextitle = {De natura deorum},
+  language = {langlatin and langgerman},
+  location = {Stuttgart},
+  translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula}
+}
+
+@Article{duggan,
+  author = {Duggan, Anne J.},
+  title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber
+	miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143},
+  shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription},
+  journal = {Scriptorium},
+  volume = {51},
+  date = {1997},
+  pages = {51-68},
+  gender = {sf},
+  number = {1},
+  hyphenation = {english},
+  annotation = {Ein englischsprachiger Aufsatz in einer Zeitschrift.
+	Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte
+  das Feld \texttt{number} und seine Ausgabe.},  
+}
+
+@THESIS{geer,
+  author = {de Geer, Ingrid},
+  title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music},
+  date = {1985},
+  type = {phdthesis},
+  annotation = {Dies ist ein typischer \texttt{thesis}-Eintrag für eine Dissertationsschrift.
+	Man beachte das Feld \texttt{type} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, das
+	einen \emph{localization key} enthält.},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  institution = {Uppsala Universitet},
+  location = {Uppsala},
+  subtitle = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study}
+}
+
+@BOOK{iliad,
+  author = {Homer},
+  title = {Die Ilias},
+  shorttitle = {Ilias},
+  publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler},
+  date = {2004},
+  edition = {3},
+  annotation = {Eine deutsche Übersetzung der \emph{Ilias}. Man beachte die Felder
+	\texttt{translator} und \texttt{introduction}, das Format des \texttt{location}-Felds
+	in der \texttt{bib}-Datei sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und
+	\texttt{indextitle}.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indextitle = {Ilias, Die},
+  introduction = {Latacz, Joachim},
+  location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich},
+  sorttitle = {Ilias},
+  translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{kant:kpv,
+  author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+  shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+  pages = {1--163},
+  bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+  publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+  date = {1968},
+  annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag,
+	der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der praktischen Vernunft} bezieht,
+	nicht auf den gesamten fünften Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{author}
+	und \texttt{bookauthor} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. In den Standardeinstellungen
+	wird \texttt{bookauthor} ignoriert, falls die Werte der Felder \texttt{author}
+	und \texttt{bookauthor} identisch sind.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+  shorthand = {KpV},
+  volume = {5}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{kant:ku,
+  author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+  pages = {165--485},
+  bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+  publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+  date = {1968},
+  annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag,
+	der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der Urtheilskraft} bezieht, nicht
+	auf den gesamten fünften Band.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  location = {Berlin},
+  maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+  shorthand = {KU},
+  volume = {5}
+}
+
+@INREFERENCE{enzensberger,
+  author = {Enzensberger, Horst},
+  title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot},
+  xref = {LMA},
+  volume = {2},
+  date = {1983},
+  location = {München and Zürich},
+  pages = {1484},
+  pagination = {column},
+  bookpagination = {column},
+  booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+  gender = {sm},
+  hyphenation = {ngerman},
+  annotation = {Ein Lexikonartikel, also ein typischer \texttt{inreference}-Eintrag.
+    Zu beachten sind auch die Felder \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} und
+    \texttt{bookpagination}}
+}
+
+@REFERENCE{LMA,
+  title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+  location = {München and Zürich},
+  date = {1980/1999},
+  gender = {pp},
+  hyphenation = {ngerman},
+  volumes = {10},
+  shorthand = {LMA},
+  options = {acronym=true},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{reference}-Eintrag, gedacht für Nachschlagewerke. Intern
+    nichts anderes als ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte auch das Feld
+    \texttt{options}.}
+}
+
+@ONLINE{markey,
+  author = {Markey, Nicolas},
+  title = {Tame the BeaST},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag einer Anleitung. Man beachte das Format
+	des \texttt{date}-Feldes (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei.},
+  date = {2005-10-16},
+  hyphenation = {american},
+  sorttitle = {Tame the Beast},
+  subtitle = {The B to X of \BibTeX},
+  url = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf},
+  urldate = {2006-10-01},
+  version = {1.3}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Meisen1931,
+  author = {Meisen, Karl},
+  title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande},
+  shorttitle = {Nikolauskult},
+  subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung},
+  date = {1981},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{origdate}
+  und \texttt{origlocation}, die dafür sorgen, dass \texttt{date} und \texttt{location}
+  als \enquote*{Nachdruck} erscheinen.},
+  gender = {sm},
+  series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde},
+  number = {9--12},
+  location = {Düsseldorf},
+  origlocation = {Düsseldorf},
+  origdate = {1931}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{nietzsche:historie,
+  author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck},
+  shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie},
+  subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+  pages = {243--334},
+  bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+	Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+  publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+  date = {1988},
+  editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+  annotation = {Ein einzelner Beitrag aus der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken.
+	Dieser \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf einen Essay im
+	ersten Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}
+	und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}.
+	Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Eintrag erscheinen, der den gesamten
+	ersten Band wiedergibt.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indexsorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben},
+  indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+  location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+  mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+  maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+  sorttitle = {Werke-01-243},
+  sortyear = {1988-01-243},
+  volume = {1}
+}
+
+@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa,
+  author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+  subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+  publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+  date = {1988},
+  editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+  edition = {2},
+  annotation = {Die kritische Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser \texttt{book}-Eintrag
+	bezieht sich auf die gesamte, 15-bändige Edition. Man beachte das
+	\texttt{volumes}-Feld und das Format der Felder \texttt{publisher}
+	und \texttt{location} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. Man beachte außerdem
+	die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}, die die Sortierung
+	der Bibliographie beeinflussen.},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke},
+  location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+  sorttitle = {Werke-00-000},
+  sortyear = {1988-00-000},
+  volumes = {15}
+}
+
+@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa1,
+  author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+	Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+  shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+  publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+  date = {1988},
+  editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+  edition = {2},
+  annotation = {Ein einzelner Band der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser
+	\texttt{book}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf den ersten Band. Man beachte
+	die Felder \texttt{title} und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder
+	\texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}. Dieser Eintrag soll nach
+	dem Eintrag erscheinen, der die gesamte Edition anführt.},
+  bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  hyphenation = {german},
+  indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke I},
+  indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+  location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+  mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+  maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+  sorttitle = {Werke-01-000},
+  sortyear = {1988-01-000},
+  volume = {1}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{springer,
+  author = {Springer, Otto},
+  title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome},
+  shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes},
+  volume = {12},
+  date = {1950},
+  pages = {92--122},
+  annotation = {Ein einfacher \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder
+  \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies},
+  shortjournal = {Med. Stud\adddot},
+}
+
+@BOOK{vazques-de-parga,
+  author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and
+	Ur{\'i}a R{\'i}u, Juan},
+  title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+  shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones},
+  publisher = {Iberdrola},
+  date = {1993},
+  note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49},
+  annotation = {Ein mehrbändiges Buch. Dies ist ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit den
+	Feldern \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.},
+  hyphenation = {spanish},
+  indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las},
+  location = {Pamplona},
+  sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+  volumes = {3}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses,
+  editor = {Giese, Martina},
+  title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+  shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+  location = {Hannover},
+  date = {2004},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte das Feld \texttt{shorthand}
+  und vergleiche im Sigelverzeichnis. Man beachte außerdem die Option \texttt{citedas}
+  im \texttt{options}-Feld.},
+  gender = {sf},
+  series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi},
+  number = {72},
+  options = {citedas=false},
+  shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{jaffe,
+  editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp},
+  title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum
+	natum \textsc{mcxcviii}},
+  shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+  date = {1885/1888},
+  edition = {2},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag mit den Feldern \texttt{edition} und
+	\texttt{volumes}. Man beachte außerdem die Felder \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype}
+	und \texttt{library}.},
+  library = {Bibliothek: Signatur},
+  location = {Leipzig},
+  editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul},
+  editoratype = {redactor},
+  volumes = {2}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{britannica,
+  editor = {Preece, Warren E.},
+  title = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+  publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+  date = {2003},
+  edition = {15},
+  annotation = {Dies ist ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag für ein Lexikon. Man beachte
+	die \texttt{useeditor}-Option im \texttt{options}-Feld sowie das \texttt{sorttitle}-Feld.
+	Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Titel einsortiert werden, obwohl es
+	einen Herausgeber gibt. Außerdem soll der Titel unter \enquote*{E}
+	einsortiert werden, nicht unter \enquote*{T}. Man beachte außerdem
+	das \texttt{label}-Feld, das für Autor-Jahr-Stile angegeben wurde.},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  indextitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New},
+  label = {EB},
+  location = {Chicago, Ill.},
+  options = {useeditor=false},
+  sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+  volumes = {32}
+}
+
+@ONLINE{ctan,
+  title = {CTAN},
+  date = {2006},
+  annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag. Der \textsc{url}, der im Feld \texttt{url}
+	steht, wird automatisch in einen Link verwandelt, sofern die \texttt{hyperref}-Unterstützung
+	geladen wurde. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{urldate}-Felds
+	(\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei.
+  Man beachte außerdem das \texttt{label}-Feld, das als \emph{fallback}
+	(Sicherung) von Zitierstilen genutzt werden kann, die die Felder
+	\texttt{author} und\slash oder \texttt{year} bzw. \texttt{date} benötigen.},
+  hyphenation = {american},
+  label = {CTAN},
+  subtitle = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network},
+  url = {http://www.ctan.org},
+  urldate = {2006-10-01}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+  author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+  title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+  journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+  date = {2007},
+  volume = {42},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {13},
+  issue = {Januar--März},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+  author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+  title = {Creativity},
+  journal = {The American Psychologist},
+  date = {1950-09},
+  volume = {5},
+  number = {9},
+  pages = {444--454},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+  author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+  title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+  subtitle = {A critical essay},
+  journal = {Addiction},
+  date = {1997},
+  volume = {92},
+  number = {12},
+  pages = {1619-1637},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+  author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+  title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+  journal = {Blaubuch},
+  date = {1906},
+  volume = {1},
+  pages = {1726-1730},
+  issue = {4. Quartal},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-13},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+  author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+  title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+  journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+  date = {2000},
+  volume = {57},
+  pages = {241-245},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+  author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+  title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+  journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+  number = {23773},
+  pages = {1-3},
+  issue = {Morgenblatt},
+  date = {1930-11-19},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+  author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+  title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+  journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+  date = {2007},
+  number = {119},
+  pages = {62},
+  issue = {IV},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+  author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+  title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+  subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+  number = {237},
+  pages = {16},
+  date = {2005-10-14},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+  author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+  title = {Furor poeticus},
+  subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie
+    der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik
+    Rilkes und Kafkas},
+  journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+  date = {2007-02},
+  number = {2},
+  url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+  author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+  title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+  subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger
+    Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+  journal = {Theater heute},
+  date = {2006},
+  number = {5},
+  pages = {14-18},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+  author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+  title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+  journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+  date = {1922-03-30},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+  author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+  title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+  subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  journal = {Sinn und Form},
+  date = {1960},
+  pages = {363--385},
+  issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+  author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+  title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart
+    Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+  journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+  date = {2006-03-14},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+  author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+  title = {Rose Bernd},
+  journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+  date = {2006-04},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies,
+  author = {{Wulfstan von York}},
+  title = {The homilies of Wulfstan},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Sandpiper Books},
+  date = {1998},
+  editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  isbn = {0-19-811101-0},
+  options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true},
+  origlocation = {Oxford},
+  origdate = {1957},
+  annotation = {Eine Edition von Predigten eines mittelalterlichen Autors. Man beachte das Feld
+    \texttt{options} sowie die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} und \texttt{origdate}.}
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3247a8e6fa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..37a6e6ff79c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+  style=footnote-dw,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+  %acronyms=true,
+  annotation=true,
+  %citedas=false,
+  %edbyidem=false,
+  %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+  %edstringincitations=false,
+  %edsuper=true,
+  %firstfullname=true,
+  %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %herename=false,
+  %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %idembib=false,
+  %idembibformat=dash,
+  %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+  library=true,
+  %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %nolocation=true,
+  %nopublisher=false,
+  %oldauthor=false,
+  %omiteditor=true,
+  %omitpages=true,
+  %origfields=false,
+  %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+  %pageref=true,
+  %pagetotal=true,
+  %pseudoauthor=false,
+  %series=afteryear,
+  %shorthandibid=false,
+  %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+  %shortjournal=true,
+  %terselos=false,
+  %xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+  %autocite=plain,
+	%citetracker=false,
+	%doi=true,
+	%eprint=true,
+	%ibidtracker=false,
+  %idemtracker=false,
+	%isbn=true,
+	%pagetracker=false,
+  hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{de-examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Der Stil \texttt{footnote-dw}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{\cite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.}
+
+\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\cite[25]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9bfc76e762f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fe78deb9383
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+  style=authortitle-dw,
+%%% biblatex-dw options %%%
+  %acronyms=true,
+  annotation=true,
+  %citedas=false,
+  %edbyidem=false,
+  %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+  %edstringincitations=false,
+  %edsuper=true,
+  %firstfull=true,
+  %firstfullname=true,
+  %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %herename=false,
+  %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %idembib=false,
+  %idembibformat=dash,
+  %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+  library=true,
+  %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %nolocation=true,
+  %nopublisher=false,
+  %oldauthor=false,
+  %omiteditor=true,
+  %omitpages=true,
+  %origfields=false,
+  %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+  %pagetotal=true,
+  %pseudoauthor=false,
+  %series=afteryear,
+  %shorthandibid=false,
+  %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+  %shortjournal=true,
+  %terselos=false,
+  %xref=true,
+%% biblatex options %%%
+  %autocite=plain,
+	%citetracker=false,
+	%doi=true,
+	%eprint=true,
+	%ibidtracker=false,
+  %idemtracker=false,
+	%isbn=true,
+	%pagetracker=false,
+  hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-dw} style}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[See][]{springer}
+
+\cite[See][59--63]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][]{springer}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][59--63]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text.
+
+\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+\cite{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[again]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{kant:ku}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0d4f17b9f1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0d45af6b97f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+% v 1.3
+% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[babel]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+  style=footnote-dw,
+%%% biblatex-dw options %%%
+  %acronyms=true,
+  annotation=true,
+  %citedas=false,
+  %edbyidem=false,
+  %editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+  %edstringincitations=false,
+  %edsuper=true,
+  %firstfullname=true,
+  %firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %herename=false,
+  %ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %idembib=false,
+  %idembibformat=dash,
+  %idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+  library=true,
+  %namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+  %nolocation=true,
+  %nopublisher=false,
+  %oldauthor=false,
+  %omiteditor=true,
+  %omitpages=true,
+  %origfields=false,
+  %origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+  %pageref=true,
+  %pagetotal=true,
+  %pseudoauthor=false,
+  %series=afteryear,
+  %shorthandibid=false,
+  %shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+  %shortjournal=true,
+  %terselos=false,
+  %xref=true,
+%% biblatex options %%%
+  %autocite=plain,
+	%citetracker=false,
+	%doi=true,
+	%eprint=true,
+	%ibidtracker=false,
+  %idemtracker=false,
+	%isbn=true,
+	%pagetracker=false,
+  hyperref
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{footnote-dw} style}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{\cite[See][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{\cite[See][59--63]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][59--63]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\footnote{\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text.}
+
+\footnote{\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\cite[25]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[again]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/examples-dw.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/examples-dw.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..34b161729ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-dw/examples/examples-dw.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,781 @@
+@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " }
+@STRING{cup	  = "Cambridge University Press" }
+@STRING{dtv	  = "Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag" }
+
+@Article{angenendt,
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {Angenendt, Arnold},
+  indextitle	  = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+  title		  = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde},
+  shorttitle	  = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+  journaltitle	  = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
+  volume	  = {97},
+  date		  = {2002},
+  pages		  = {431--456, 791--823},
+  annotation	  = {A German article in a French journal. Apart from that, a typical
+		    \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{library}, \texttt{shortjournal}
+		    and \texttt{options} fields},
+  shortjournal = {RHE},
+  options = {acronym=true},
+	library = {Here is room for some notes regarding the library in which the work is available}
+}
+
+@Article{springer,
+  hyphenation	  = {british},
+  author	  = {Springer, Otto},
+  title		  = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome},
+  shorttitle	  = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes},
+  journaltitle	  = {Mediaeval Studies},
+  volume	  = {12},
+  date		  = {1950},
+  pages		  = {92--122},
+  annotation	  = {A plain \texttt{article} entry. Note the field \texttt{shortjournal}.},
+  shortjournal = {Med.\ Stud\adddot}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:anima,
+  keywords	  = {primary},
+  hyphenation	  = {british},
+  author	  = {Aristotle},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  editor	  = {Hicks, Robert Drew},
+  title		  = {De Anima},
+  publisher	  = cup,
+  location	  = {Cambridge},
+  date		  = {1907},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor}}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:physics,
+  keywords	  = {primary},
+  hyphenation	  = {american},
+  author	  = {Aristotle},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  translator	  = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.},
+  title		  = {Physics},
+  shorttitle	  = {Physics},
+  publisher	  = {G. P. Putnam},
+  location	  = {New York},
+  date		  = {1929},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{translator} field}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:poetics,
+  keywords	  = {primary},
+  hyphenation	  = {british},
+  author	  = {Aristotle},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  editor	  = {Lucas, D. W.},
+  title		  = {Poetics},
+  shorttitle	  = {Poetics},
+  series	  = {Clarendon Aristotle},
+  publisher	  = {Clarendon Press},
+  location	  = {Oxford},
+  date		  = {1968},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor} as well as
+		    a \texttt{series} field}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:rhetoric,
+  keywords	  = {primary},
+  hyphenation	  = {british},
+  author	  = {Aristotle},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  editor	  = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+  commentator	  = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+  sorttitle	  = {Rhetoric of Aristotle},
+  indextitle	  = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The},
+  title		  = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith Cope},
+  shorttitle	  = {Rhetoric},
+  volumes	  = {3},
+  publisher	  = cup,
+  date		  = {1877},
+  annotation	  = {A commented edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and
+		    \texttt{commentator} fields as well as the \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{sorttitle},
+		    and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/bland,
+  keywords	  = {primary},
+  hyphenation	  = {american},
+  author	  = {Averroes},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  editor	  = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+  translator	  = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+  indextitle	  = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The},
+  title		  = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect by Ibn
+		    Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni},
+  shorttitle	  = {Possibility of Conjunction},
+  series	  = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought},
+  number	  = {7},
+  publisher	  = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America},
+  location	  = {New York},
+  date		  = {1982},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}. Note the
+		    concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields as well as
+		    the \texttt{indextitle} field}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/hannes,
+  keywords	  = {primary},
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {Averroes},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  editor	  = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+  translator	  = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+  annotator	  = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+  sorttitle	  = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  indexsorttitle  = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  indextitle	  = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  title		  = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der
+		    Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}},
+  shorttitle	  = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+  publisher	  = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
+  location	  = {Halle an der Saale},
+  date		  = {1892},
+  annotation	  = {An annotated edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor},
+		    \texttt{translator}, and \texttt{annotator} fields. Also note the
+		    \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and
+		    \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/hercz,
+  keywords	  = {primary},
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {Averroes},
+  options = {oldauthor},
+  editor	  = {Hercz, J.},
+  translator	  = {Hercz, J.},
+  indexsorttitle  = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction},
+  indextitle	  = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction},
+  title		  = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects mit dem
+		    Menschen},
+  subtitle	  = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von Samuel Ibn
+		    Tibbon},
+  shorttitle	  = {Drei Abhandlungen},
+  publisher	  = {S.~Hermann},
+  location	  = {Berlin},
+  date		  = {1869},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and
+		    \texttt{translator} fields as well as the \texttt{indextitle} and
+		    \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{cicero,
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius},
+  editor	  = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+  translator	  = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+  afterword	  = {Thraede, Klaus},
+  indextitle	  = {De natura deorum},
+  title		  = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter},
+  shorttitle	  = {De natura deorum},
+  language	  = {langlatin and langgerman},
+  publisher	  = {Reclam},
+  location	  = {Stuttgart},
+  date		  = {1995},
+  annotation	  = {A bilingual edition of Cicero's \emph{De natura deorum}, with a German
+		    translation. Note the format of the \texttt{language} field in the database
+		    file, the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields,
+		    and the \texttt{afterword} field}
+}
+
+@Article{duggan,
+  author = {Duggan, Anne J.},
+  title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber
+	miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143},
+  shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription},
+  journal = {Scriptorium},
+  volume = {51},
+  date = {1997},
+  pages = {51-68},
+  gender = {sf},
+  number = {1},
+  hyphenation = {english},
+  annotation = {A typical \texttt{article} entry. Note the field
+  \texttt{number}.},  
+}
+
+@Book{iliad,
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {Homer},
+  translator	  = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang},
+  introduction	  = {Latacz, Joachim},
+  sorttitle	  = {Ilias},
+  indextitle	  = {Ilias, Die},
+  title		  = {Die Ilias},
+  shorttitle	  = {Ilias},
+  edition	  = {3},
+  publisher	  = {Artemis \& Winkler},
+  location	  = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich},
+  date		  = {2004},
+  annotation	  = {A German translation of the \emph{Iliad}. Note the \texttt{translator} and
+		    \texttt{introduction} fields and the format of the \texttt{location} field in
+		    the database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{nietzsche:ksa,
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  sortyear	  = {1988-00-000},
+  author	  = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  editor	  = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+  sorttitle	  = {Werke-00-000},
+  indexsorttitle  = {Samtliche Werke},
+  title		  = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+  subtitle	  = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+  volumes	  = {15},
+  edition	  = {2},
+  publisher	  = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+  location	  = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+  date		  = {1988},
+  annotation	  = {The critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This is a \texttt{book} entry
+		    referring to a 15-volume work as a whole. Note the \texttt{volumes} field and
+		    the format of the \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{location} fields in the
+		    database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields
+		    which are used to fine-tune the sorting order of the bibliography. We want this
+		    item listed first in the bibliography}
+}
+
+@Book{nietzsche:ksa1,
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  sortyear	  = {1988-01-000},
+  author	  = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  bookauthor	  = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  editor	  = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+  sorttitle	  = {Werke-01-000},
+  indexsorttitle  = {Samtliche Werke I},
+  indextitle	  = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+  title		  = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+		    Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+  shorttitle	  = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+  maintitle	  = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+  mainsubtitle	  = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+  volume	  = {1},
+  edition	  = {2},
+  publisher	  = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+  location	  = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+  date		  = {1988},
+  annotation	  = {A single volume from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This
+		    \texttt{book} entry explicitly refers to the first volume only. Note the
+		    \texttt{title} and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle}
+		    and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to be listed after the entry
+		    referring to the entire edition}
+}
+
+@Book{vazques-de-parga,
+  hyphenation	  = {spanish},
+  author	  = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and Ur{\'i}a
+		    R{\'i}u, Juan},
+  sorttitle	  = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+  indextitle	  = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las},
+  title		  = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+  shorttitle	  = {Peregrinaciones},
+  volumes	  = {3},
+  publisher	  = {Iberdrola},
+  location	  = {Pamplona},
+  date		  = {1993},
+  note		  = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49},
+  annotation	  = {A multivolume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{book} entry with
+		    \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Collection{britannica,
+  options	  = {useeditor=false},
+  label		  = {EB},
+  hyphenation	  = {british},
+  editor	  = {Preece, Warren E.},
+  sorttitle	  = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+  indextitle	  = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New},
+  title		  = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+  volumes	  = {32},
+  edition	  = {15},
+  publisher	  = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+  location	  = {Chicago, Ill.},
+  date		  = {2003},
+  annotation	  = {This is a \texttt{collection} entry for an encyclopedia. Note the
+		    \texttt{useeditor} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as the
+		    \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want this entry to be cited and alphabetized by
+		    title even though there is an editor. In addition to that, we want the title to
+		    be alphabetized under \enquote*{E} rather than \enquote*{T}. Also note the
+		    \texttt{label} field which is provided for author-year citation styles}
+}
+
+@Collection{jaffe,
+  editor	  = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp},
+  editora	  = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul},
+  editoratype = {redactor},
+  title		  = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum natum
+		    \textsc{mcxcviii}},
+  shorttitle	  = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+  volumes	  = {2},
+  edition	  = {2},
+  location	  = {Leipzig},
+  date		  = {1885/1888},
+  annotation	  = {A \texttt{collection} entry with \texttt{edition} and \texttt{volumes} fields.
+		    Note the \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype} and \texttt{library} fields},
+  library = {Library: Shelfmark}
+}
+
+@InBook{kant:kpv,
+  shorthand	  = {KpV},
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  bookauthor	  = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  title		  = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+  shorttitle	  = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+  booktitle	  = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+  maintitle	  = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+  volume	  = {5},
+  publisher	  = {Walter de Gruyter},
+  location	  = {Berlin},
+  date		  = {1968},
+  pages		  = {1--163},
+  annotation	  = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an
+		    \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Practical
+		    Reason} only, not to the entire fifth volume. Note the \texttt{author} and
+		    \texttt{bookauthor} fields in the database file. By default, the
+		    \texttt{bookauthor} is omitted if the values of the \texttt{author} and
+		    \texttt{bookauthor} fields are identical}
+}
+
+@InBook{kant:ku,
+  shorthand	  = {KU},
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  bookauthor	  = {Kant, Immanuel},
+  title		  = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+  booktitle	  = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+  maintitle	  = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+  volume	  = {5},
+  publisher	  = {Walter de Gruyter},
+  location	  = {Berlin},
+  date		  = {1968},
+  pages		  = {165--485},
+  annotation	  = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an
+		    \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Judgment}
+		    only, not to the entire fifth volume}
+}
+
+@InBook{nietzsche:historie,
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  sortyear	  = {1988-01-243},
+  author	  = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  bookauthor	  = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+  editor	  = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+  sorttitle	  = {Werke-01-243},
+  indexsorttitle  = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben},
+  indextitle	  = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+  title		  = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck},
+  subtitle	  = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+  shorttitle	  = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie},
+  booktitle	  = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+		    Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+  maintitle	  = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+  mainsubtitle	  = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+  volume	  = {1},
+  publisher	  = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+  location	  = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+  date		  = {1988},
+  pages		  = {243--334},
+  annotation	  = {A single essay from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This
+		    \texttt{inbook} entry explicitly refers to an essay found in the first volume.
+		    Note the \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}, and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also
+		    note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to
+		    be listed after the entry referring to the entire first volume}
+}
+
+@InCollection{brandt,
+  options	  = {useprefix=false},
+  hyphenation	  = {german},
+  author	  = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann},
+  editor	  = {Ferdinand Seibt},
+  indexsorttitle  = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+  indextitle	  = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448, Die},
+  title		  = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+  shorttitle	  = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder},
+  booktitle	  = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter},
+  series	  = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte},
+  number	  = {2},
+  publisher	  = {Klett-Cotta},
+  location	  = {Stuttgart},
+  date		  = {1987},
+  pages		  = {884--917},
+  annotation	  = {An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}.
+		    Note the format of the printed name and compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in
+		    the \texttt{options} field. Also
+		    note the \texttt{indextitle, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}}
+}
+
+@Online{ctan,
+  label		  = {CTAN},
+  hyphenation	  = {american},
+  title		  = {CTAN},
+  subtitle	  = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network},
+  date		  = {2006},
+  url		  = {http://www.ctan.org},
+  urldate	  = {2006-10-01},
+  annotation	  = {This is an \texttt{online} entry. The \textsc{url}, which is given in the
+		    \texttt{url} field, is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref}
+		    support has been enabled. Note the format of the \texttt{urldate} field
+		    (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.
+		    Also note the \texttt{label} field which may be used as a fallback by citation
+		    styles which need an \texttt{author} and\slash or a \texttt{year}}
+}
+
+@Online{markey,
+  hyphenation	  = {american},
+  author	  = {Markey, Nicolas},
+  sorttitle	  = {Tame the Beast},
+  title		  = {Tame the BeaST},
+  subtitle	  = {The B to X of \BibTeX},
+  version	  = {1.3},
+  date		  = {2005-10-16},
+  url		  = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf},
+  urldate	  = {2006-10-01},
+  annotation	  = {An \texttt{online} entry for a tutorial. Note the format of the \texttt{date}
+		    field (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.}
+}
+
+@Thesis{geer,
+  hyphenation	  = {british},
+  author	  = {de Geer, Ingrid},
+  title		  = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music},
+  subtitle	  = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study},
+  institution	  = {Uppsala Universitet},
+  type		  = {phdthesis},
+  location	  = {Uppsala},
+  date		  = {1985},
+  annotation	  = {This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for a PhD thesis. Note the
+		    \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key.}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses,
+  editor = {Giese, Martina},
+  title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+  shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+  location = {Hannover},
+  date = {2004},
+  annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry. Note the \texttt{shorthand} field and compare
+        the List of Shorthands. Not also the \texttt{citedas} option in the \texttt{options}
+        field},
+  gender = {sf},
+  series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi},
+  number = {72},
+  file = {dMGH:http\://www.dmgh.de/dmghband.html?bsbbandname=00000719&frameaction=bandansicht:URL},
+  keywords = {Quelle, Deutsches Reich, 10. Jahrhundert, 11. Jahrhundert},
+  shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+  options = {citedas=false}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Meisen1931,
+  author = {Meisen, Karl},
+  title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande},
+  shorttitle = {Nikolauskult},
+  subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung},
+  origlocation = {Düsseldorf},
+  origdate = {1931},
+  annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{origdate} and \texttt{origlocation}
+        fields and the \enquote*{reprint} output},
+  gender = {sm},
+  series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde},
+  number = {9--12},
+  location = {Düsseldorf},
+  date = {1981}
+}
+
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+  author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+  title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+  journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+  date = {2007},
+  volume = {42},
+  number = {1},
+  pages = {13},
+  issue = {Januar--März},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+  author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+  title = {Creativity},
+  journal = {The American Psychologist},
+  date = {1950-09},
+  volume = {5},
+  number = {9},
+  pages = {444--454},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+  author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+  title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+  subtitle = {A critical essay},
+  journal = {Addiction},
+  date = {1997},
+  volume = {92},
+  number = {12},
+  pages = {1619-1637},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-06},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+  author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+  title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+  journal = {Blaubuch},
+  date = {1906},
+  volume = {1},
+  pages = {1726-1730},
+  issue = {4. Quartal},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03-13},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  volume = {91},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+  author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+  title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+  journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+  date = {2000},
+  volume = {57},
+  pages = {241-245},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+  author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+  title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+  journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+  number = {23773},
+  pages = {1-3},
+  issue = {Morgenblatt},
+  date = {1930-11-19},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  number = {65},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+  author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+  title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+  journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+  date = {2007},
+  number = {119},
+  pages = {62},
+  issue = {IV},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+  author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+  title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+  subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+  journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+  number = {237},
+  pages = {16},
+  date = {2005-10-14},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+  author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+  title = {Furor poeticus},
+  subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie
+    der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik
+    Rilkes und Kafkas},
+  journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+  date = {2007-02},
+  number = {2},
+  url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+  author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+  title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+  subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger
+    Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+  journal = {Theater heute},
+  date = {2006},
+  number = {5},
+  pages = {14-18},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+  author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+  title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+  journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+  date = {1922-03-30},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939-03},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+  author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+  title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+  subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+  journal = {Sinn und Form},
+  date = {1960},
+  pages = {363--385},
+  issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+  author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+  title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart
+    Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+  journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+  date = {2006-03-14},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+  author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+  title = {Rose Bernd},
+  journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+  date = {2006-04},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+  author = {Anonym},
+  title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+  journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+  pages = {2},
+  date = {1939},
+  keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@INREFERENCE{enzensberger,
+  author = {Enzensberger, Horst},
+  title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot},
+  xref = {LMA},
+  volume = {2},
+  date = {1983},
+  location = {München and Zürich},
+  pages = {1484},
+  pagination = {column},
+  bookpagination = {column},
+  booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+  gender = {sm},
+  hyphenation = {ngerman},
+  annotation = {An article in a work of reference (e.g. in an
+    encyclopedia or in a dictionary), thus a typical \texttt{inreference} entry.
+    Note also the fields \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} and
+    \texttt{bookpagination}}
+}
+
+@REFERENCE{LMA,
+  title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+  location = {München and Zürich},
+  date = {1980/1999},
+  gender = {pp},
+  hyphenation = {ngerman},
+  volumes = {10},
+  shorthand = {LMA},
+  options = {acronym=true},
+  annotation = {A \texttt{reference} entry. This entry type is meant for works of reference, e.g.
+    encyclopedias or dictionaries. Internally, it is just an alias for a \texttt{collection} entry.
+    Note also the field \texttt{options}.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies,
+  author = {{Wulfstan of York}},
+  title = {The homilies of Wulfstan},
+  location = {London},
+  publisher = {Sandpiper Books},
+  date = {1998},
+  editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy},
+  hyphenation = {british},
+  isbn = {0-19-811101-0},
+  options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true},
+  origlocation = {Oxford},
+  origdate = {1957},
+  annotation = {An edition of homilies by one medieval author. Note the \texttt{options} field
+    as well as the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} and \texttt{origdate}.}
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..63235482766
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,832 @@
+% authortitle-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.bbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2010/02/14}
+  {}
+  {\PackageError{biblatex}
+    {Outdated 'biblatex' package}
+    {The version of the 'authortitle-dw' style you are using\MessageBreak
+     requires biblatex v0.9 or later.\MessageBreak
+     You are using: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak
+     This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now.}%
+    \endinput}
+  
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{bbx:annotation}
+\newbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+\newbool{bbx:edsuper}
+\newbool{bbx:idembib}
+\newbool{bbx:library}
+\newbool{bbx:nolocation}
+\newbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+\newbool{bbx:oldauthor}
+\newbool{bbx:origfields}
+\newbool{bbx:pseudoauthor}
+\newbool{oldauthor}
+\newbool{pseudoauthor}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{oldauthor}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{oldauthor}}
+\DeclareEntryOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{pseudoauthor}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{annotation}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:annotation}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edbyidem}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edbyidem}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edsuper}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edsuper}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembib}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:idembib}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{library}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:library}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{nolocation}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nolocation}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{nopublisher}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nopublisher}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{oldauthor}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:oldauthor}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfields}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:origfields}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pseudoauthor}}
+
+\newcommand{\bbx@idembibformat}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@editorstring}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@namefont}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{}
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@idemfont}{empty}% wichtig zur Überprüfung wegen Paket-Warnung bei falscher Option
+\newcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{editorstring}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@option@editorstring}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstnamefont}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidemfont}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembibformat}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@idembibformat}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idemfont}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@option@idemfont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{namefont}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@option@namefont}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfieldsformat}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{#1}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{%
+  edbyidem=true,
+  editorstring=parens,
+  firstnamefont=normal,
+  ibidemfont=normal,
+  idembib=true,
+  idembibformat=idem,
+  namefont=normal,
+  nolocation=false,
+  nopublisher=true,
+  oldauthor=true,
+  origfields=true,
+  origfieldsformat=punct,
+  pseudoauthor=true
+}
+
+%% Autoren, Herausgeber und Übersetzter in der Bibliographie
+\DeclareNameAlias{author}{sortname}
+\DeclareNameAlias{editor}{sortname}
+\DeclareNameAlias{translator}{sortname}
+
+%% Komma statt Punkt nach einzelnen Elementen der Literaturangaben
+\renewcommand*{\newunitpunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Titel und Untertitel
+\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addperiod\space}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon)
+\newcommand*{\titleaddonpunct}{\addperiod\space}
+
+%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren
+\renewcommand*{\labelnamepunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Jahr
+\newcommand*{\locationdatepunct}{\addspace}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Verlag
+\newcommand*{\locationpublisherpunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Verlag und Jahr
+\newcommand*{\publisherdatepunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Zeichen vor 'Nachdruck' bei Benutzung von 'origfields'
+\newcommand*{\origfieldspunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Zeichen für pseudoauthor=true
+\newcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{}
+\newcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{}
+
+%% Zeichen zw. Autoren/Editoren in der Bibliographie
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+  \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+  \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+  \let\revsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim%
+  \let\multinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim%
+  \let\finalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim%
+%
+%% 'Ders.' statt '--' in der Bibliographie
+	\ifdefstring{\bbx@idembibformat}{idem}
+    {\renewcommand*{\bibnamedash}{\bibsentence\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}}%
+    {}%
+}
+
+%% Formate in der Bibliographie
+\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inbook]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[incollection]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{title}{%
+  \bibstring{inrefstring}%
+  \enquote{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inproceedings]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[thesis]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{volume}{#1}% volume of an inreference entry
+\DeclareFieldFormat{type}{\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\textsc{url}\addcolon\space\url{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{edition:super}{% für Option 'edsuper'
+  \ifinteger{#1}
+    {\textsuperscript{#1}}
+    {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+      The 'edition' field of entry\MessageBreak
+      '\abx@field@entrykey' is not an integer.\MessageBreak
+      The edition will not be printed as\MessageBreak
+      superscript. Instead, the 'edition'\MessageBreak
+      field is printed completely}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%
+  \ifinteger{#1}
+    {\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}
+    {#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthand}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:acronym}
+      {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+      {#1\isdot}}
+    {#1\isdot}} 
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:acronym}
+      {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+      {#1\isdot}}
+    {#1\isdot}} 
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shortjournal}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:acronym}
+      {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+      {#1\isdot}}
+    {#1\isdot}} 
+
+\newcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+\newcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{%
+  \annotationfont #1\addperiod}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{library}{%
+  \libraryfont #1\addperiod}
+
+\newbibmacro*{finentry:annotation}{%
+  \iffieldundef{annotation}
+    {\finentry}%
+    {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+     \printfield{annotation}}%
+}
+
+\newbibmacro*{finentry:library}{%
+  \iffieldundef{library}
+    {\finentry}%
+    {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+     \printfield{library}}%
+}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{finentry}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:annotation}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:library}% BEIDE true
+      {\iffieldundef{annotation}
+        {}% kein \finentry!
+        {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+         \printfield{annotation}}%
+       \usebibmacro{finentry:library}}
+      {\usebibmacro{finentry:annotation}}}% nur annotation=true    
+    {\ifbool{bbx:library}% nur library=true
+      {\usebibmacro{finentry:library}}
+      {\finentry}}}% BEIDE false
+
+% Ausschalten von annotation und library für die List of Shorthands
+\AtEveryLositem{%
+  \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}%
+  \boolfalse{bbx:library}%
+}
+
+%% Wichtig für die Herausgebernamen in der List of Shorthands
+\InitializeBibliographyStyle{%
+  \let\bbx@lasthash\undefined}
+
+% Formatierung der Nachnamen entsprechend der Option 'namefont'
+% Nachnamen von Einträgen mit 'options = {oldauthor=true}' oder 'options = {oldauthor}'
+% werden nicht in der Schrift von 'namefont' gesetzt
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamelast}[1]{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+ {\ifthenelse{%
+  \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+  \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+    \OR
+    \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+  \)}
+  {#1}
+  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+	  {\textsc{#1}}%
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+	    {\textit{#1}}
+	    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+	      {\textbf{#1}}
+	      {#1}}}}}
+ {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+   {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+	  {\textsc{#1}}%
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+	    {\textit{#1}}
+	    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+	      {\textbf{#1}}
+	      {#1}}}}}}
+	      
+% Formatierung der Vornamen entsprechend der Option 'firstnamefont'
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamefirst}[1]{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+ {\ifthenelse{%
+  \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+  \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+    \OR
+    \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+  \)}
+  {#1}
+  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+	  {\textsc{#1}}%
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+	    {\textit{#1}}
+	    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+	      {\textbf{#1}}
+	      {#1}}}}}
+ {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+   {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+	  {\textsc{#1}}%
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+	    {\textit{#1}}
+	    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+	      {\textbf{#1}}
+	      {#1}}}}}}
+
+% Wenn 'firstnamefont' gesetzt ist, muss auch prefix angepasst werden
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnameprefix}[1]{%
+ \ifuseprefix{% bei useprefix=true
+	 \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+	 {\ifthenelse{%
+	  \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+	  \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+	    \OR
+	    \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+	  \)}
+	  {#1}
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+		  {\textsc{#1}}%
+		  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+		    {\textit{#1}}
+		    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+		      {\textbf{#1}}
+		      {#1}}}}}
+	 {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+	   {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+		  {\textsc{#1}}%
+		  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+		    {\textit{#1}}
+		    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+		      {\textbf{#1}}
+		      {#1}}}}}}
+  {% bei useprefix=false richtet es sich nach der Option firstname
+	  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+		  {\textsc{#1}}%
+		  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+		    {\textit{#1}}
+		    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+		      {\textbf{#1}}
+		      {#1}}}}}
+
+% Wenn 'firstnamefont' gesetzt ist, muss auch suffix angepasst werden
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnameaffix}[1]{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+	 {\ifthenelse{%
+	  \boolean{oldauthor}\AND
+	  \(\ifcurrentname{author}
+	    \OR
+	    \(\ifcurrentname{labelname}\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}\)
+	  \)}
+  	  {#1}
+	    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+		    {\textsc{#1}}%
+		    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+		      {\textit{#1}}
+		      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+		        {\textbf{#1}}
+		        {#1}}}}}
+	 {% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+	   {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}%
+		  {\textsc{#1}}%
+		  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}%
+		    {\textit{#1}}
+		    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}%
+		      {\textbf{#1}}
+		      {#1}}}}}}
+
+%% \mkidem:
+% wenn im Feld 'options' 'oldauthor=true' oder 'oldauthor' steht,
+% werden keine Kapitälchen o.ä. bei Wiederholungszitaten ('Ders.') gesetzt
+% ansonsten Formatierung der Vornamen entsprechend der Option 'idemfont',
+% falls diese nicht vorhanden ist, wird der Wert von 'namefont' übernommen
+\newcommand*{\mkidem}[1]{% 
+ \ifbool{bbx:oldauthor}% bei globaler Option oldauthor=true
+	{\ifbool{oldauthor}
+	  {#1}
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{smallcaps}%
+		  {\textsc{#1}}%
+		  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{italic}%
+		    {\textit{#1}}
+		    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{bold}%
+		      {\textbf{#1}}
+		      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{normal}%
+		        {#1}
+		        {% falls idemfont nicht gesetzt ist, wird von namefont 'geerbt':
+             \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+               {\textsc{#1}}%
+               {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+                 {\textit{#1}}
+                 {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+                   {\textbf{#1}}
+                   {#1}}}}}}}}}%
+	{% bei globaler Option oldauthor=false
+   \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{smallcaps}%
+	  {\textsc{#1}}%
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{italic}%
+	    {\textit{#1}}
+	    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{bold}%
+	      {\textbf{#1}}
+	      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{normal}%
+	        {#1}
+	        {% falls idemfont nicht gesetzt ist, wird von namefont 'geerbt':
+           \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}%
+             {\textsc{#1}}%
+             {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}%
+               {\textit{#1}}
+               {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}%
+                 {\textbf{#1}}
+                 {#1}}}}}}}}}
+		      
+%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon)
+\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
+  \iffieldundef{title}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[title]{%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
+       \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
+     \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+     \printfield{titleaddon}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
+  \iffieldundef{booktitle}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[booktitle]{%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
+       \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
+     \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+     \printfield{booktitleaddon}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{maintitle}{%
+  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[maintitle]{%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{maintitle}%
+       \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{mainsubtitle}}%
+     \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+     \printfield{maintitleaddon}}}
+
+%% Ort, Verlag, Jahr:
+%% - mit 'origfields=true' werden origlocation, origpublisher
+%%   und origyear gesetzt, der Rest als 'reprint' angehängt
+%% - der Verlag ist optional (nopublisher=true|false)
+%% - die Edition kann hochgestellt werden (edsuper=true|false)
+\newbibmacro*{origdate}{\printorigdate}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:origfields}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+      {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+        {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+        {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}
+      {\iflistundef{origlocation}
+        {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+          {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+          {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}
+        {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+          {\blxdw@warning{%
+             Field 'origlocation' is set, but 'origdate' is 
+             \MessageBreak%
+             empty at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'.
+             The 'orig' fields \MessageBreak are omitted
+             for this entry}%
+           \usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+          {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}}
+
+\newbibmacro{loc+pub+year}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+    {}
+    {\printlist{location}%
+     \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+       {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+       {\iflistundef{publisher}
+         {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+         {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+          \printlist{publisher}%
+          \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+    {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{date}%
+  \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+    {}
+    {\printlist{origlocation}%
+     \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+       {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+       {\iflistundef{origpublisher}
+         {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+         {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+          \printlist{origpublisher}%
+          \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+    {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{origdate}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct}
+    {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}%
+     \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens}
+      {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+       \printtext[parens]{%
+         \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets}
+        {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+         \printtext[brackets]{%
+           \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}
+        {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}%
+         \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}}
+  \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}{%
+  \bibstring{reprint}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+    {}
+    {\printlist{location}%
+     \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+       {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+       {\iflistundef{publisher}
+         {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+         {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+          \printlist{publisher}%
+          \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+  \usebibmacro{date}}
+
+%% Test, ob ein Feld nur eine Zahl beinhaltet
+\newcommand{\bbx@iffieldinteger}[1]{%
+  \iffieldundef{#1}
+    {\@secondoftwo}
+    {\edef\@tempa{\strfield{#1}}%
+     \expandafter\ifinteger\expandafter{\@tempa}}}
+
+%% Edition nur ausgeben, wenn Option 'edsuper=false'
+\newbibmacro*{edition}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+    {\bbx@iffieldinteger{edition}
+       {}% falls 'edition' eine Zahl ist, wird hochgestellt
+       {\printfield{edition}%
+        \newunit}}% ansonsten wird komplett ausgegeben
+    {\printfield{edition}%
+     \newunit}}
+          
+%% Herausgeber ('Hrsg.') je nach Option editorstring
+\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%
+  \iffieldundef{editortype}
+    {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+        {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{editors}}}%
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+          {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{editors}}}%
+          {\bibstring{editors}}}}%
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+        {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{editor}}}%
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+          {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{editor}}}%
+          {\bibstring{editor}}}}}%
+    {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+        {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}%
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+          {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}%
+          {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}}%
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+        {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}%
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+          {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}%
+          {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}}}}%
+
+\renewbibmacro*{editor+othersstrg}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+    {\def\@tempa{editors}}
+    {\def\@tempa{editor}}%
+  \ifnamesequal{editor}{translator}
+    {\appto\@tempa{tr}%
+     \clearname{translator}}
+    {}%
+  \ifnamesequal{editor}{commentator}
+    {\appto\@tempa{co}%
+     \clearname{commentator}}
+    {\ifnamesequal{editor}{annotator}
+       {\appto\@tempa{an}%
+	\clearname{annotator}}
+       {}}%
+  \ifnamesequal{editor}{introduction}
+    {\appto\@tempa{in}%
+     \clearname{introduction}}
+    {\ifnamesequal{editor}{foreword}
+       {\appto\@tempa{fo}%
+	\clearname{foreword}}
+       {\ifnamesequal{editor}{afterword}
+          {\appto\@tempa{af}%
+           \clearname{afterword}}
+          {}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}
+    {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\@tempa}}}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}
+      {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\@tempa}}}
+      {\bibstring{\@tempa}}}}
+
+%% Übersetzer ('Übers.') je nach Option editorstring
+\renewbibmacro*{translatorstrg}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+      {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{translators}}}%
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+        {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{translators}}}%
+        {\bibstring{translators}}}}%
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+      {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{translator}}}%
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+        {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{translator}}}%
+        {\bibstring{translator}}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator+othersstrg}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}}
+    {\def\abx@tempa{translators}}
+    {\def\abx@tempa{translator}}%
+  \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator}
+    {\appto\abx@tempa{co}%
+     \clearname{commentator}}
+    {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator}
+       {\appto\abx@tempa{an}%
+	\clearname{annotator}}
+       {}}%
+  \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction}
+    {\appto\abx@tempa{in}%
+     \clearname{introduction}}
+    {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword}
+       {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}%
+	\clearname{foreword}}
+       {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword}
+          {\appto\abx@tempa{af}%
+           \clearname{afterword}}
+          {}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}
+    {\mkbibparens{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}
+      {\mkbibbrackets{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}
+      {\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}}
+        
+%% Option 'editorstring=brackets|parens|normal'
+%% Option 'idembib=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+      {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+                   \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+         {\bibnamedash}
+         {\printnames{editor}%
+          \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+      {\printnames{editor}}%
+     \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+       {\addspace}%
+       {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+         {\addspace}%
+         {\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+     \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+       {}
+       {\labelnamepunct}%
+     \clearname{editor}}
+    {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{editor+others}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+      {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+                   \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+         {\bibnamedash}
+         {\printnames{editor}%
+          \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+      {\printnames{editor}}%
+     \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+       {\addspace}%
+       {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+         {\addspace}%
+         {\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}%
+     \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+       {}
+       {\labelnamepunct}%
+     \clearname{editor}}
+    {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+      {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+                   \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+         {\bibnamedash}
+         {\printnames{translator}%
+          \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+      {\printnames{translator}}%
+     \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+       {\addspace}%
+       {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+         {\addspace}%
+         {\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}%
+     \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+       {}
+       {\labelnamepunct}%
+     \clearname{translator}}
+    {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator+others}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+      {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+                   \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+         {\bibnamedash}
+         {\printnames{translator}%
+          \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+      {\printnames{translator}}%
+     \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+       {\addspace}%
+       {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+         {\addspace}%
+         {\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{translator+othersstrg}%
+     \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+       {}
+       {\labelnamepunct}%
+     \clearname{translator}}
+    {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+%% Option 'idembib=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{author}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:pseudoauthor}
+    {\usebibmacro{author:pseudotrue}}
+    {\usebibmacro{author:pseudofalse}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{author:pseudotrue}{%
+  \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+    {\printtext{\bibleftpseudo}}
+    {}%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifuseauthor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+      {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+                   \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+        {\bibnamedash}
+        {\printnames{author}%
+         \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}
+      {\printnames{author}}}
+    {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+  \iffieldundef{authortype}
+    {}
+    {\addcomma\space
+     \usebibmacro{authorstrg}}%
+  \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+    {\printtext{\bibrightpseudo}}
+    {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{author:pseudofalse}{%
+  \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+    {}
+    {\ifthenelse{\ifuseauthor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}}
+      {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+        {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+                     \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+          {\bibnamedash}
+          {\printnames{author}%
+           \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}
+        {\printnames{author}}}
+      {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+    \iffieldundef{authortype}
+      {}
+      {\addcomma\space
+       \usebibmacro{authorstrg}}}}
+    
+%% 'Ders.' bei inbook, wenn gleicher Autor
+\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
+  \ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+      {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}\addcolon}
+      {\printnames{bookauthor}%
+       \newunit\newblock}}
+    {\printnames{bookauthor}%
+     \newunit\newblock}}
+
+%% Wenn Autor und Hrsg. gleich --> hg. v. dems./ders./dens.:
+\renewbibmacro*{byeditor+others}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}\AND
+              \(\iffieldundef{editortype}\OR
+	        \iffieldequalstr{editortype}{editor}\)}
+    {\def\abx@tempa{byeditor}%
+     \ifnamesequal{editor}{translator}
+       {\appto\abx@tempa{tr}%
+        \clearname{translator}}
+       {}%
+     \ifnamesequal{editor}{commentator}
+       {\appto\abx@tempa{co}%
+        \clearname{commentator}}
+       {\ifnamesequal{editor}{annotator}
+          {\appto\abx@tempa{an}%
+           \clearname{annotator}}
+          {}}%
+     \ifnamesequal{editor}{introduction}
+       {\appto\abx@tempa{in}%
+        \clearname{introduction}}
+       {\ifnamesequal{editor}{foreword}
+          {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}%
+           \clearname{foreword}}
+          {\ifnamesequal{editor}{afterword}
+             {\appto\abx@tempa{af}%
+              \clearname{afterword}}
+             {}}}%
+     \bibstring{\abx@tempa}%
+     \setunit{\addspace}%
+     \printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+     \clearname{editor}%
+     \newunit
+     \usebibmacro{byeditorx}}%
+    {\ifnamesequal{editor}{author}
+	     {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+	        {\bibstring{byeditor}\addspace\bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+	        {\usebibmacro{byeditor}}}%
+	     {\usebibmacro{byeditor}}}%
+  \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Makros aus authortitle.bbx (unverändert)  %%%%% 
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+
+\renewcommand*{\thebibitem}{\item}
+\renewcommand*{\thelositem}{\item}
+\setlength{\bibitemsep}{0pt}
+
+\renewenvironment*{thebibliography}
+  {\list
+     {}
+     {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
+      \setlength{\itemindent}{-\leftmargin}%
+      \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+      \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
+  {\endlist}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4cffc2510fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+% footnote-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.bbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2010/02/14}
+  {}
+  {\PackageError{biblatex}
+    {Outdated 'biblatex' package}
+    {The version of the 'footnote-dw' style you are using\MessageBreak
+     requires biblatex v0.9 or later.\MessageBreak
+     You are using: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak
+     This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now.}%
+    \endinput}
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{authortitle-dw}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/standard-dw.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/standard-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8bdd7cf0d44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/bbx/standard-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,1710 @@
+% standard-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.bbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard}
+
+\DeclareLanguageMapping{english}{english-dw}
+\DeclareLanguageMapping{german}{german-dw}
+
+\newbool{bbx:acronym}
+\newbool{bbx:journumafteryear}
+\newbool{bbx:journumdate}
+\newbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}
+\newbool{bbx:shortjournal}
+\newbool{bbx:terselos}
+\newbool{bbx:xref}% soll xref überhaupt verwendet werden?
+\newbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}
+
+% Schalter zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder
+\newbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+
+\newlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth}
+\newlength{\shorthandsep}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{acronym}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:acronym}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{acronyms}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shorthandacro}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandwidth}{%
+  \setlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth}{#1}
+  \setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+  \csuse{booltrue}{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shortjournal}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shortjournal}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{terselos}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:terselos}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{xref}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:xref}}
+
+% Optionen zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pagetotal}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pagetotal}}
+
+% journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{journalnumber}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{#1}}
+% zu Ehren von Bernhard Tempel
+\newbool{bbx:bernhard}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{bernhard}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:bernhard}}
+
+% Option series=standard|afteryear
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@series}{}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{series}{%
+  \renewcommand{\bbx@option@series}{#1}}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@series}{afteryear}
+    {\global\booltrue{bbx:seriesafteryear}}
+    {\global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesafteryear}}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+  doi=false,
+  eprint=false,
+  isbn=false,
+  journalnumber=standard,
+  pagetotal=false,
+  series=standard,
+  terselos=true,
+  xref=false
+}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+    {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mincrossrefs=1}}
+    {}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{idemreference}{idemcollection}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefreference}{xrefcollection}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefidemreference}{xrefidemcollection}
+
+%% Zeichen bei Zeitschriften:
+%% -> vor 'volume' (z.B. 'Jg. ')
+\newcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace} 
+%% -> zwischen 'volume' und 'number'
+%%   (nur mit journumafteryear=true)
+\newcommand*{\jourvolnumsep}{\adddot}
+%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Nr. ')
+\newcommand*{\journumstring}{%
+  \addcomma\space%
+  \bibstring{number}%
+  \addnbspace}
+    
+%% Zeichen bei Reihen:
+%% -> vor 'series' (z.B. '= ')
+\newcommand*{\seriespunct}{} 
+%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Bd. ')
+\newcommand*{\sernumstring}{\addspace}
+
+%% Reihe in Klammern
+\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{%
+ \iffieldundef{series}%
+   {}
+   {\printtext[parens]{%
+      \seriespunct%
+      \printfield{series}%
+      \setunit*{\sernumstring}%
+      \printfield{number}%
+    \newunit}}}
+
+%% Kürzere Ausgabe der List of Shorthands
+\newbibmacro*{terselos}{%
+\ifbool{bbx:terselos}
+  {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+    {}
+    {\ifnameundef{author}
+       {\printnames{editor}%
+        \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+          {\addspace}%
+          {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+            {\addspace}%
+            {\addcomma\space}}%
+        \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}
+       {\printnames{author}}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}}%
+  \iffieldundef{booktitle}
+    {\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}}
+    {\usebibmacro{title}%
+     \newunit\newblock
+     \usebibmacro{in:}%
+     \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}}%
+  \finentry}
+  {\usedriver
+    {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+    {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+  \finentry}}
+  
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorthands}{%
+  \usebibmacro{terselos}}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung nach dem Shorthand-Label
+\newcommand{\shorthandpunct}{}
+
+%% List of Shorthands: Länge der Labels einstellbar
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\ifbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}
+  {\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+   \renewenvironment*{theshorthands}
+    {\list
+       {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}%
+        \printtext{\shorthandpunct}}
+       {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\bbx@shorthandwidth}%
+        \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+        \setlength{\labelsep}{\shorthandsep}%
+        \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+        \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+        \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}%
+        \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}}
+    {\endlist}}
+  {\renewenvironment*{theshorthands}
+    {\list
+       {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}%
+        \printtext{\shorthandpunct}}
+       {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\shorthandwidth}%
+        \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+        \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
+        \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+        \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+        \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}%
+        \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}}
+    {\endlist}}}
+
+%% bei useeditor=true
+\newbibmacro*{editorincoll}{%
+  \ifnameundef{editor}
+    {}%
+    {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}
+      {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+        {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+         \addspace}%
+        {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+         \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+           {\addspace}%
+           {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+             {\addspace}%
+             {\addcomma\space}}%
+         \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+        {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+         \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+           {\addspace}%
+           {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+             {\addspace}%
+             {\addcomma\space}}%
+         \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+     \clearname{editor}}}
+      
+%% Wenn 'volumes' und 'volume' angegeben sind,
+%% 'volumes' immer vor 'volume' ausgeben
+\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part}{%
+  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+    {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+      {}
+      {\printfield{volumes}%
+       \newunit}%
+    \iffieldundef{volume}
+      {}
+      {\printfield{volume}%
+       \printfield{part}%
+       \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}
+    {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt, 
+                          % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde
+                          % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben!
+      {\printfield{volumes}}
+      {}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{maintitle+title}{%
+  \iffieldsequal{maintitle}{title}
+    {\clearfield{maintitle}%
+     \clearfield{mainsubtitle}%
+     \clearfield{maintitleaddon}}
+    {\iffieldundef{maintitle}
+       {}
+       {\usebibmacro{maintitle}%
+      	\newunit\newblock
+        \iffieldundef{volume}
+      	  {}
+          {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+            {}
+            {\printfield{volumes}%
+             \setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+           \printfield{volume}%
+           \printfield{part}%
+           \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}}%
+        \usebibmacro{title}%
+        \newunit}
+
+%% Test, ob 'volume' vorhanden ist (bei xref parent)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolumecheck}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+    {\iffieldundef{volume}
+      {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+        {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts
+        {\listcsxadd{novolume@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}%
+      {}}
+    {}}
+
+%% Test, ob 'citedas=true' gesetzt ist (bei xref parent)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefcitedascheck}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+      {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{citedas@xrefparent}
+        {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts
+        {\listcsxadd{citedas@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}%
+      {}}
+    {}}
+
+%% Tests werden bei 'xref=true' in @book, @collection,
+%% @proceedings und @reference ausgeführt
+\AtDataInput[book]{%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[collection]{%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[proceedings]{%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[reference]{%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+  \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+
+%% 'volume' bei xref-child ausgeben, falls
+%% in xref-parent nicht definiert 
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume}{%
+  \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+    {\newunit
+     \printfield{volume}%
+     \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich
+       {}
+       {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+        \iflistxref{location}% wenn 'location' bei child und parent gleich
+         {}
+         {\printlist{location}%
+          \setunit*{\addspace}}%  
+        \usebibmacro{date}}}
+    {}}%
+
+% bei @inreference: booktitle, vol. (year)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume:inreference}{%
+  \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+    {\iffieldundef{volume}
+      {}
+      {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{citedas@xrefparent}
+        {\ifbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}
+          {\newunit
+           \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}}
+          {\setunit{\addspace}}}
+        {\newunit
+         \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}}%
+       \printfield{volume}%
+       \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich
+         {}
+         {\setunit{\addspace}%
+          \printfield[parens]{year}}}}
+    {}}
+
+%% 'volume' und 'year' ausgeben bei @inreference
+\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part+year}{%
+  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+    {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+      {}
+      {\printfield{volumes}%
+       \newunit}%
+    \iffieldundef{volume}
+      {}
+      {\setunit{\addspace}%
+       \printfield{volume}%
+       \printfield{part}}%
+    \iffieldundef{year}
+      {}
+      {\setunit{\addspace}%
+       \printfield[parens]{year}%
+       \setunit{\addspace}}}
+    {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt, 
+                          % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde
+                          % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben!
+      {\printfield{volumes}}
+      {}}}
+    
+%% Option 'shortjournal=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{journal}{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:shortjournal}
+    {\iffieldundef{shortjournal}
+      {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}}
+      {\printfield{shortjournal}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{journal:normal}{% vollständige, 'normale' Ausgabe eines Zeitschriftentitels
+  \iffieldundef{journaltitle}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[journaltitle]{%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}%
+       \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}
+
+%% Option 'journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date' 
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifbool{bbx:bernhard}% Bernhard geht vor (c;
+    {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+     \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear}
+      {\global\booltrue{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+       \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date}
+        {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+         \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}}
+        {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}
+         \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{journal}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \iffieldundef{series}
+    {}
+    {\newunit
+     \printfield{series}%
+     \setunit{\addspace}}%
+  \iffieldundef{volume}
+    {}
+    {\setunit{\jourvolstring}%
+     \printfield{volume}}%
+  % ab hier Unterscheidung nach standard|afteryear|date
+  \ifbool{bbx:journumdate}
+    {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+date}}
+    {\ifbool{bbx:journumafteryear}
+      {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}}
+      {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+standard}}}}
+
+% journalnumber=standard 
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+standard}{%
+  \iffieldundef{volume}
+    {\iffieldundef{number}
+      {}
+      {\blxdw@warning{%
+        Field 'number' set, but 'volume' is empty
+        \MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'.
+        The output might not \MessageBreak be correct}}}
+    {\setunit{\jourvolnumsep}%
+     \printfield{number}}%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \iffieldundef{volume}
+    {\iffieldundef{month}
+      {}
+      {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{issue+date}}
+    {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{issue}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\newunit%
+     \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
+  \newunit}
+
+% journalnumber=afteryear 
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}{%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \iffieldundef{volume}
+    {\iffieldundef{month}
+      {}
+      {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
+     \iffieldundef{number}
+      {}
+      {\setunit*{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+       \printfield{number}}}%
+    {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}%
+     \iffieldundef{number}
+       {}
+       {\setunit*{\journumstring}%
+        \printfield{number}}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{issue}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\newunit%
+     \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
+  \newunit}
+
+% journalnumber=date 
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+date}{%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \usebibmacro{issue+date+number}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{issue}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\newunit%
+     \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
+  \newunit}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{% Klammern entfernt
+  \iffieldundef{issue}
+    {\printdate}
+    {\printfield{issue}%
+     \setunit{\addspace}%
+     \printfield{year}}%
+  \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro*{issue+date+number}{%
+  \iffieldundef{number}
+    {\iffieldundef{issue}%
+      {\iffieldundef{month}
+        {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}}
+        {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+         \printdate}}%
+	    {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue
+	      {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+         \setunit{\addspace}%
+         \printfield{issue}}%
+        {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+         \printdate}}}%
+    {\iffieldundef{issue}% mit definiertem Feld number
+      {\iffieldundef{month}
+        {\setunit{\addspace}%
+         \printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+         \setunit{\addspace}%
+         \printfield{number}}
+        {\iffieldundef{day}
+          {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+           \printfield{number}%
+           \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+           \printfield{month}%
+           \setunit{\addspace}%
+           \printfield{year}}%
+          {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+           \printfield{number}%
+           \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+           \printdate}}}%
+	    {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue
+	      {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+         \setunit{\addspace}%
+         \printfield{number}%
+         \setunit{\addspace}%
+         \printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}}%
+        {\iffieldundef{day}%
+          {\setunit{\addspace\journumstring}%
+           \printfield{number}%
+           \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+           \printfield{month}%
+           \setunit{\addspace}%
+           \printfield{year}%
+           \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+           \printfield{issue}}%
+          {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+           \printfield{number}%
+           \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+           \printdate%
+           \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+           \printfield{issue}}}}}%
+  \newunit}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+%%%%% Bibmacros für Code, der im Bibliography   %%%%% 
+%%%%% Driver aufgerufen wird, wenn KEIN xref    %%%%% 
+%%%%% vorhanden ist.                            %%%%% 
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inbook}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}}%
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:incollection}{%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+     \newunit\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}}
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}{%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+     \newunit\newblock}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}}%		 
+       
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inreference}{%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\usebibmacro{editorincoll}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+     \newunit\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part+year}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+%%%%% Bibliography Driver     %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{issn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+  
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{booklet}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+    
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{collection}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \ifnamexref{labelname}%
+	  {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+	  {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	   \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+	\ifbool{bbx:xref}
+  	{\iffieldundef{xref}%
+      {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+  		 \usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}%
+  	  {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+       \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+       \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+    {\usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}% bei xref=false
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{incollection}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\ifnamexref{labelname}
+	    {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}
+	    {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	     \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+     \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+      {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+       \global\boolfalse{cbx:xrefnoidem}}
+      {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	     \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}%
+	\ifbool{bbx:xref}
+    {\iffieldundef{xref}
+  	  {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+       \usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}}
+  	  {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+       \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+       \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+    {\usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}}% bei xref=false
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inproceedings}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\ifnamexref{labelname}%
+	    {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+	    {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	     \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+     \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+      {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}
+      {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	     \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}%
+	\ifbool{bbx:xref}
+  	{\iffieldundef{xref}%
+  	  {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+  		  \usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}%
+  	  {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+       \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+  	   \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+    {\usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}% bei xref=false
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inreference}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit*{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{in:}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\ifnamexref{labelname}%
+	    {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}%
+	    {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	     \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+     \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+      {\global\boolfalse{bbx:xrefnoidem}}
+      {\global\booltrue{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	     \global\booltrue{cbx:xrefnoidem}}}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+    {\iffieldundef{xref}%
+  	  {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+       \usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}%
+  	  {\ifentryseen{\thefield{xref}}
+        {\boolfalse{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde schon zitiert
+        {\booltrue{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde noch nicht zitiert
+       \printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+       \usebibmacro{xrefvolume:inreference}%
+       \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+    {\usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}% bei xref=false
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{location}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
+    {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \iflistundef{location}
+    {}
+    {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+     \printtext[parens]{%
+       \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:url}
+    {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{issn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{proceedings}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isrn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{thesis}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{unpublished}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:url}
+    {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Die folgenden 'xref'-BibliographyDriver sind    %%%%% 
+%%%%% nötig, damit bei Erstzitaten mit xref die       %%%%% 
+%%%%% Option useeditor=true beachtet wird.            %%%%% 
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefbook}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+     \newunit\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefcollection}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+     \newunit\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefproceedings}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\usebibmacro{editor+others}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+     \newunit\newblock}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Die folgenden 'xrefidem'-BibliographyDriver     %%%%% 
+%%%%% sind nötig damit bei Erstzitaten mit demselben  %%%%% 
+%%%%% Autor und xref ein Vollzitat erfolgen kann,     %%%%% 
+%%%%% ohne den Autor des referenzierten Werkes (der   %%%%% 
+%%%%% durch 'idem' ersetzt wird) auszugeben.          %%%%% 
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidembook}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}%
+  \setunit{\citenamepunct}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemcollection}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+             \addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{edition}%
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemproceedings}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+             \addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+     \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printlist{organization}%
+  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+    {\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \newunit
+  \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+    {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+     \newunit\newblock}
+    {}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+%%%%%  Warnungen  %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning#1{%
+  \begingroup
+  \blx@safe@actives
+  \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\blxdw@noline}%
+  \endgroup}
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning@noline#1{%
+  \begingroup
+  \blx@safe@actives
+  \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\@gobble}%
+  \endgroup}
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning@entry#1{%
+  \ifundef\abx@field@entrykey
+    {\blxdw@warning{#1}}
+    {\blxdw@warning{#1\MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'}}}
+\let\blxdw@noline\@gobble
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct}
+    {}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens}
+      {}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets}
+        {}
+        {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+           Unknown value for option 'origfieldsformat'.\MessageBreak
+           Option 'origfieldsformat=punct' used instead}}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{smallcaps}
+    {}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{italic}
+      {}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{bold}
+        {}
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@namefont}{normal}
+          {}
+          {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+            Unknown value for option 'namefont'.\MessageBreak
+            Option 'namefont=normal' used instead}}}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{smallcaps}
+    {}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{italic}
+      {}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{bold}
+        {}
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@firstnamefont}{normal}
+          {}
+          {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+            Unknown value for option 'firstnamefont'.\MessageBreak
+            Option 'firstnamefont=normal' used instead}}}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{smallcaps}
+    {}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{italic}
+      {}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{bold}
+        {}
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{normal}
+          {}
+          {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+            Unknown value for option 'ibidemfont'.\MessageBreak
+            Option 'ibidemfont=normal' used instead}}}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{smallcaps}
+    {}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{italic}
+      {}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{bold}
+        {}
+        {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{normal}
+          {}
+          {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@idemfont}{empty}
+            {}
+            {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+              Unknown value for option 'idemfont'.\MessageBreak
+              Value of option 'namefont' used instead}}}}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}
+    {}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}
+      {}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{normal}
+        {}
+        {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{editorstring=parens}%
+         \blxdw@warning@noline{%
+          Unknown value for option 'editorstring'.\MessageBreak
+          Option 'editorstring=parens' used instead}}}}%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{standard}
+    {}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear}
+      {}
+      {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date}
+        {}
+        {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+           Unknown value for option 'journalnumber'.\MessageBreak
+           Option 'journalnumber=standard' used instead}}}}%
+  \iftoggle{blx@useeditor}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+      {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+         Option 'omiteditor' cannot be used\MessageBreak
+         together with option 'useeditor=true'.\MessageBreak
+         Thus, 'omiteditor' is ignored}}
+      {}}%
+    {}%
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3111bedb54c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,369 @@
+% authortitle-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+  
+\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.cbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex citation style]
+
+\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{cbx:firstfull}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfull}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:firstfull}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+  \global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}%
+  \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+  \global\let\cbx@tempa\empty
+  \ifbool{cbx:firstfull}
+    {\ifciteseen
+      {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}}
+      {\usebibmacro{cite:firstfull}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}}}
+  
+\newbibmacro*{cite:normal}{%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+       {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+                               \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+          \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+          \usebibmacro{cite:save}}
+         {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+           {}
+           {\usebibmacro{cite:name}}%
+            \usebibmacro{cite:title}}%
+          \ifuseeditor
+            {}
+            {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+              {}
+              {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+                {\newunit
+                 \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}
+                {}}}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}%
+    {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}%
+       {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}%
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:firstfull}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+                         \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+     \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}}
+    {}%
+  \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}  
+  \usebibmacro{cite:save}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{%
+  \usedriver
+    {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+      {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+      {}%
+     \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+    {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+      {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+      {}}%
+  \iffieldundef{postnote}
+  	{}%
+  	{\iffieldundef{pages}
+  		{}%
+  		{\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+                   \boolean{cbx:omitpages}}
+  		  {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+  		   \herenamepunct%
+         \bibstring{herename}}
+  		  {}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
+  \cbx@tempa
+  \printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}%
+  \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite}{%
+  \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+  \ifnameundef{labelname}
+    {\gdef\cbx@tempa{%
+       \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+       \addspace\bibleftparen}%
+    \BibliographyWarning{No author or editor given for \textcite}%
+    \textbf{\thefield{entrykey}}}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:firstfullname}
+      {\printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}}
+      {\printnames{labelname}}%
+     \gdef\cbx@tempa{%
+       \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+       \addspace\bibleftparen}%
+     \usebibmacro{cite:save}}%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+       {\ifsingletitle
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}}
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}}}%
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+
+%% xref
+\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+  \global\let\cbx@tempa\empty
+  \ifbool{cbx:firstfull}
+    {\ifciteseen
+      {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+        {\ifuseeditor
+          {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+            {}%
+            {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+               {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}
+                \citenamepunct}%
+               {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}}}
+          {}%
+         \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+         \ifuseeditor
+           {}
+           {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+             {}
+             {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+               {\newunit
+                \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}
+               {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+		             {\newunit
+                  \bibstring{byeditor}%
+                  \setunit{\addspace}%
+                  \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+                 {\newunit
+                  \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}}}%
+        {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+      {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}%
+         {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+           {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}}%
+           {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}}}%
+    {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+      {\ifuseeditor
+        {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+          {}%
+          {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+		        {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}%
+		         \citenamepunct}%
+		        {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+    		      {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}%
+	    	      {\printnames{labelname}%
+  	  	       \citenamepunct}}}}
+  	  	{}%
+       \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+       \ifuseeditor
+         {}
+         {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+           {}
+           {\newunit
+            \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}%
+      {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}}
+
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+  \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+    \iffieldundef{shorthand}%
+      {\ifuseeditor
+        {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+          {}
+          {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+		        {\printnames{labelname}%
+		         \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}%
+		        {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+		          {\midsentence%
+		           \usebibmacro{cite:idem}}%
+		          {\printnames{labelname}%
+  		         \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}}}}
+        {}%
+       \iffieldundef{shorttitle}%
+         {\printfield{title}}%
+         {\printfield{shorttitle}}%
+       \ifuseeditor
+         {}
+         {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+           {}
+           {\ifnameundef{editor}
+             {}
+             {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	             {\newunit
+               \usebibmacro{byeditor}}%
+               {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+		             {\newunit
+                  \bibstring{byeditor}%
+                  \setunit{\addspace}%
+                  \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+                 {\newunit
+                  \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}}}}}%
+      {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}}      
+      
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{%
+  \usedriver
+    {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+      {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+      {}%
+     \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+    {xref\thefield{entrytype}}%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+      {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+      {}}}%
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{%
+  \usedriver
+    {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+      {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+      {}%
+     \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}%
+     \clearfield{editor}}
+    {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+      {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+      {}}}%
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\textcite}
+  {\boolfalse{cbx:parens}%
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{textcite}}
+  {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+     {\bibrightparen\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
+     {}%
+   \multicitedelim}
+  {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+     {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+        {\bibrightparen}
+        {}}%
+     {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+        {\postnotedelim}
+        {\addspace\bibleftparen}%
+      \printfield{postnote}\bibrightparen}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usedriver
+     {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+       {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+       {}%
+      \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+     {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+   {}
+   {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+                \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+                  \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+   	 {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+      \herenamepunct%
+      \bibstring{herename}}
+   	 {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+    \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]
+  {\bibsentence
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usedriver
+     {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+       {\global\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+       {}%
+      \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+     {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+   {}
+   {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+                \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+                  \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+   	 {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+      \herenamepunct%
+      \bibstring{herename}}
+   	 {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+    \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{citetitle}{%
+  \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+  \global\let\cbx@tempa\empty
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}}}%
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{%
+  \cbx@tempa
+  \ifsingletitle
+    {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \citenamepunct, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird
+    {\printtext[bibhyperlink]{%
+       \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title:force}{%
+  \cbx@tempa
+  \printtext[bibhyperlink]{%
+    \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Unverändert übernommen aus authortitle-ibid.cbx %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\newbool{cbx:parens}
+\newbool{cbx:loccit}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidpage}[true]{%
+  \ifstrequal{#1}{true}
+    {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=constrict}}
+    {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=false}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{%
+  \cbx@tempa
+  \printtext[bibhyperref]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}%
+  \ifloccit
+    {\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}
+    {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+  \ifbool{cbx:loccit}
+    {}%
+    {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand*{\cite}
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{citetitle}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand*{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{citetitle}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkbibfootnote]
+  {\bibsentence
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4df49f87aba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+% footnote-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.cbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex citation style]
+
+\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{cbx:pageref}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pageref}[true]{%
+  \setbool{cbx:pageref}{#1}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+  uniquename=false,  % damit bei idem=false Vor- und Nachname gesetzt werden!
+  loccittracker=true,% für die Option 'ibidpage'
+}
+
+% Kommandos zum Verpacken der Zitate in Fußnoten
+\newrobustcmd{\mkfootnotecite}[1]{%
+  \iffootnote
+    {#1}
+    {\unspace\footnote{%
+       \toggletrue{blx@footnote}%
+       \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}}
+       
+\newbool{cbx:parencitefoot}% wenn parencite innerhalb einer 
+                           % Fußnote aufgerufen wird 
+                           % (wichtig für seenote)
+\newrobustcmd{\mkparencite}[1]{%
+  \iffootnote
+    {\booltrue{cbx:parencitefoot}%
+     \begingroup
+     \let\mkbibparens\mkbibbrackets
+     \bibleftparen#1\bibrightparen
+     \endgroup}
+    {\unspace\footnote{%
+       \toggletrue{blx@footnote}%
+       \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+  \global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}%
+  \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+  \bibhypertarget{cite\the\value{instcount}}{%
+    \ifciteseen
+      {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+         {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+            {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}%
+             \usebibmacro{cite:save}%
+             \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+            {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+                                    \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+              {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+               \usebibmacro{cite:title}}
+              {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+                 {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}
+                 {\usebibmacro{cite:name}%
+                  \ifopcit
+                    {\ifloccit
+                      {\usebibmacro{cite:loccit}}
+                      {\usebibmacro{cite:opcit}}}
+                    {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}}}%
+             \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}
+         {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}%
+           {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}%
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}%
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+           {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}%
+          \usebibmacro{cite:save}%
+          \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}}
+      {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+                              \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+       	 {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+          \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}}
+       	 {}%
+       \usebibmacro{cite:full}%
+       \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{footref}{%
+  \csxdef{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}%
+  \label{cbx@\the\value{instcount}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{%
+  \usebibmacro{footref}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {\ifnameundef{editor}
+      {\setunit{}}
+      {}}%
+    {\setunit{}}%
+  \printtext[bibhypertarget]{%
+    \usedriver
+      {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+        {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+        {}%
+       \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+      {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+    \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+      {}
+      {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+        {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+        {}}%
+    \iffieldundef{pages}
+   		{}%
+   		{\iffieldundef{postnote}
+   			{}%
+   			{\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+                     \boolean{cbx:omitpages}}
+   			  {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+   			   \herenamepunct%
+           \bibstring{herename}}
+   			  {}}}}}
+   			
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{%
+  \ifsingletitle
+    {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \citenamepunct, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird
+    {\printtext[bibhyperlink]{%
+       \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}%
+  \ifuseeditor
+    {}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+      {}
+      {\ifnameundef{editor}
+        {}
+        {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	        {\newunit
+           \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}%
+          {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+		        {\newunit
+             \bibstring{byeditor}%
+             \setunit{\addspace}%
+             \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+            {\newunit
+             \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}}}%
+  \usebibmacro{cite:seenote}}
+            
+\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
+  \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\printfield{shorthand}}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:seenote}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:seenote}{%
+  \ifbool{cbx:parencitefoot}
+    {\addspace\mkbibbrackets{%
+      \bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace%\ref{\thefield{entrykey}}%
+      \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+      \ifbool{cbx:pageref}
+        {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}}
+                    {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}
+          {}
+          {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace
+    	     \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}}
+        {}}}
+    {\addspace\mkbibparens{%
+      \bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace%\ref{\thefield{entrykey}}%
+      \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+      \ifbool{cbx:pageref}
+        {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}}
+                    {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}
+          {}
+          {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace
+    	     \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}}
+        {}}}}
+
+%% xref
+\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+  \ifciteseen
+    {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+      {\ifuseeditor
+        {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+          {}%
+          {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}%
+              \citenamepunct}%
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}}}
+        {}%
+       \usebibmacro{cite:title}}       
+      {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+    {\ifbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}%
+       {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}}%
+         {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}}}%
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{%
+  \usebibmacro{footref}%
+  \usedriver
+    {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+      {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+      {}%
+     \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+    {xref\thefield{entrytype}}%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+      {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+      {}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{%
+  \usebibmacro{footref}%
+  \usedriver
+    {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+      {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+      {}%
+     \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}%
+     \clearfield{editor}}
+    {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {}
+    {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+      {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+      {}}}%
+      
+%% falls eine Bibliographie ausgegeben wird,
+%% soll kein '(wie Anm. x)' erscheinen
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+  \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+    \iffieldundef{shorthand}%
+      {\ifuseeditor
+        {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+          {}
+          {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+		        {\printnames{labelname}%
+		         \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}%
+		        {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+		          {\midsentence%
+		           \usebibmacro{cite:idem}}%
+		          {\printnames{labelname}%
+  		         \printtext{\labelnamepunct}}}}}
+        {}%
+       \iffieldundef{shorttitle}%
+         {\printfield{title}}%
+         {\printfield{shorttitle}}%
+       \ifuseeditor
+         {}
+         {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+           {}
+           {\ifnameundef{editor}
+             {}
+             {\ifbool{bbx:xrefnoidem}%
+	             {\newunit
+               \usebibmacro{byeditor}}%
+               {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+		             {\newunit
+                  \bibstring{byeditor}%
+                  \setunit{\addspace}%
+                  \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+                 {\newunit
+                  \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}}}}}%
+      {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}}      
+    
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkparencite]
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+  {\bibsentence
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usedriver
+     {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+       {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+       {}%
+      \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+     {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+   {}
+   {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+                \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+                  \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+   	 {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+      \herenamepunct%
+      \bibstring{herename}}
+   	 {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+    \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+  {\bibsentence
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usedriver
+     {\ifbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+       {\booltrue{cbx:omitpages}}
+       {}%
+      \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+     {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\iffieldundef{postnote}
+   {}
+   {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:option:herename}\AND\NOT
+                \(\iffieldundef{pages}\OR
+                  \boolean{cbx:omitpages}\)}
+   	 {\global\booltrue{cbx:herename}%
+      \herenamepunct%
+      \bibstring{herename}}
+   	 {\global\boolfalse{cbx:herename}}%
+    \usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\cites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\cite}{\multicitedelim}
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\parencites}[\mkparencite]{\parencite}{\multicitedelim}
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\footcites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\footcite}{\multicitedelim}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Unverändert aus verbose-trad1 übernommen  %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% 
+
+\newbool{cbx:loccit}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidpage}[true]{%
+  \ifstrequal{#1}{true}
+    {\renewbibmacro*{cite:ibid:page}{\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}}
+    {\renewbibmacro*{cite:ibid:page}{}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:opcit}{%
+  \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{opcit}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:loccit}{%
+  \printtext{%
+    \bibhyperlink{cite\@nameuse{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}}{%
+      \bibstring[\mkibid]{loccit}}}%
+  \global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{%
+  \printtext{%
+    \bibhyperlink{cite\@nameuse{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}}{%
+      \bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}}%
+  \ifloccit
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid:page}}
+    {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid:page}{}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+  \ifbool{cbx:loccit}
+    {}
+    {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+       
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/standard-dw.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/standard-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2258c80549e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/cbx/standard-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+% standard-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.cbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex citation style]
+
+\newbool{cbx:authedxref}
+\newbool{cbx:citedas}
+\newbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+\newbool{cbx:firstfullname}
+\newbool{cbx:herename}
+\newbool{cbx:idemfull}
+\newbool{cbx:noidem}
+\newbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+\newbool{cbx:omitpages}
+\newbool{cbx:option:herename}
+\newbool{cbx:option:omitpages}
+\newbool{cbx:xrefnoidem}
+\newbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}
+\newbool{cbx:shorthandibid}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{citedas}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edstringincitations}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:edstringincitations}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfullname}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:firstfullname}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{herename}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:option:herename}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{omiteditor}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:omiteditor}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{omitpages}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:option:omitpages}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandibid}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{citedas}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}}
+\DeclareEntryOption{shorthandibid}[true]{%
+  \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+  autocite=footnote,
+  citedas=true,
+  citetracker=true,
+  edstringincitations=true,
+  herename=true,
+  ibidtracker=constrict,
+  idemtracker=constrict,
+  loccittracker=false,
+  opcittracker=false,
+  pagetracker=true,
+  shorthandibid=true
+}
+
+\InitializeCitationStyle{%
+  \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+
+\OnManualCitation{%
+  \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:reset}{%
+  \global\undef\cbx@lasthash%
+  \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:save}{%
+  \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
+  \csxdef{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}%
+  \global\boolfalse{cbx:noidem}}
+
+% Ausschalten von annotation und library für Zitate im Text
+\AtEveryCite{%
+  \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}%
+  \boolfalse{bbx:library}%
+}
+
+%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren
+\newcommand*{\citenamepunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Slashes zwischen Autoren/Editoren
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\AtEveryCite{%
+ \let\revsdnamedelim\citerevsdnamedelim
+ \let\multinamedelim\citemultinamedelim
+ \let\finalnamedelim\citefinalnamedelim
+}
+\AtBeginBibliography{% am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses umschalten wegen xref
+ \let\citerevsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim
+ \let\citemultinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim
+ \let\citefinalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim
+}
+
+%% Titelformate in Zitaten
+\DeclareFieldFormat{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inbook]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[incollection]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inproceedings]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[thesis]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labelyear}{#1}% e.g., the 'a' in '1995a'
+
+%% herename
+\newcommand*{\herenamepunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:name}{%
+  \printnames{labelname}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}}
+    {}%
+  \setunit*{\citenamepunct}}
+  
+\newbibmacro*{cite:idem}{%
+  \bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}}
+    {}%
+  \setunit{\citenamepunct}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}{%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\ifnameundef{author}%
+                          \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+       {\addspace}%
+       {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+         {\addspace}%
+         {\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+     \clearname{editor}}
+    {}%
+  \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\ifnameundef{author}%
+                              \AND\ifnameundef{editor}%
+                              \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{brackets}%
+       {\addspace}%
+       {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@editorstring}{parens}%
+         {\addspace}%
+         {\addcomma\space}}%
+     \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}%
+     \clearname{translator}}
+    {}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
+  \iffieldundef{postnote}
+    {}
+    {\ifthenelse{\boolean{cbx:herename}\AND\NOT
+                 \boolean{cbx:omitpages}}
+       {\addspace}
+       {\postnotedelim}%
+     \printfield{postnote}}}
+
+% Option 'nameseen'
+\newcommand*{\cbx@seennames}{}
+\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@nameseen}[1]{%
+  \listxadd{\cbx@seennames}{\detokenize{#1}}}
+\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@ifnameseen}[1]{%
+  \xifinlist{\detokenize{#1}}{\cbx@seennames}}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifbool{cbx:firstfullname}
+    {\DeclareNameFormat{citeauthor}{%
+       \cbx@ifnameseen{#1#3#5#7}
+         {\usebibmacro{name:last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
+         {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
+          \cbx@nameseen{#1#3#5#7}}%
+       \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
+     \DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor}
+       {\boolfalse{citetracker}%
+        \boolfalse{pagetracker}%
+        \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+       {\indexnames{labelname}%
+        \printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}}
+       {\multicitedelim}
+       {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+    {}}
+
+%% Formatierung von 'ibidem' entsprechend der Option 'ibidemfont'
+\providecommand*{\mkibid}[1]{%
+  \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{smallcaps}%
+	  {\textsc{#1}}%
+	  {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{italic}%
+	    {\textit{#1}}
+	    {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@ibidemfont}{bold}%
+	      {\textbf{#1}}
+	      {#1}}}}
+
+%% pages (berücksichtigt die Option 'omitpages')
+\newbibmacro*{pages}{%
+  \ifbool{cbx:omitpages}
+    {}% keine Seitenzahl bei Vollzitat und omitpages=true
+    {\setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+     \printfield{pages}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{%
+  \printfield{chapter}%
+  \ifbool{cbx:omitpages}
+	  {}% keine Seitenzahl bei Vollzitat und omitpages=true
+		{\setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+     \printfield{pages}}%
+  \newunit}
+
+%% in manchen Literaturverweisen (wenn nicht fullcite)
+%% müssen statt der vollen Namen (Format [byeditor])
+%% nur die Nachnamen ausgegeben werden (Format [labelname]) 
+\newbibmacro*{cite:byeditor}{%
+  \ifnameundef{editor}
+    {}
+    {\bibstring{byeditor}%
+     \setunit{\addspace}%
+     \printnames[labelname]{editor}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:editor}{%
+  \ifnameundef{editor}
+    {}
+    {\printnames[labelname]{editor}%
+     \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+       {\addspace%
+        \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}
+       {\citenamepunct}
+     \clearname{editor}}}
+  
+%% Test, ob author und editor bei xref identisch sind
+%% (für xref=true, useeditor=false, edbyidem=true)
+\newbibmacro*{authedxrefcheck}{%
+  \iffieldundef{xref}
+    {}
+    {\savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempa}%
+     \entrydata{\bbx@tempa}{%
+       \savename{editor}{\bbx@tempa}}%
+     \ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempa}%
+      {\booltrue{cbx:authedxref}}
+      {\boolfalse{cbx:authedxref}}}}
+
+%% xref
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\bbx@xref}
+	{}%
+	{\usebibmacro{cite:xref}}%
+	{}%
+	{}%
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/english-dw.lbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/english-dw.lbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..80f923cadd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/english-dw.lbx
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+% english-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{english-dw.lbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex localization file]
+
+\NewBibliographyString{herename,idemdat,idemdatsf,idemdatsm,%
+  idemdatsn,idemdatpf,idemdatpm,idemdatpn,idemdatpp,inrefstring}
+
+\InheritBibliographyExtras{english}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
+  inherit          = {english},
+  herename         = {{here}{here}},
+  idemdat          = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+  idemdatsm        = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+  idemdatsf        = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+  idemdatsn        = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+  idemdatpm        = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+  idemdatpf        = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+  idemdatpn        = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+  idemdatpp        = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+  inrefstring      = {{article}{art\adddot}},
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/german-dw.lbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/german-dw.lbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0cbb88ab3a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-dw/lbx/german-dw.lbx
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+% german-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2010
+
+\ProvidesFile{german-dw.lbx}[2010/03/11 v1.3 biblatex localization file]
+
+\InheritBibliographyExtras{german}
+
+\NewBibliographyString{herename,idemdat,idemdatsf,idemdatsm,%
+  idemdatsn,idemdatpf,idemdatpm,idemdatpn,idemdatpp,inrefstring}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
+  inherit          = {german},
+  herename         = {{hier}{hier}},
+  idem             = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}},
+  idemsm           = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}},
+  idemsf           = {{dieselbe}{dies\adddot}},
+  idemsn           = {{dasselbe}{dass\adddot}},
+  idempm           = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+  idempf           = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+  idempn           = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+  idempp           = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+  ibidem           = {{ebenda}{ebd\adddot}},
+  idemdat          = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+  idemdatsm        = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+  idemdatsf        = {{derselben}{ders\adddot}},
+  idemdatsn        = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+  idemdatpm        = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+  idemdatpf        = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+  idemdatpn        = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+  idemdatpp        = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+  inrefstring      = {{Artikel\addspace}{Art\adddotspace}},
+  seenote          = {{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\adddot}},
+  reprint          = {{Nachdruck}{Ndr\adddot}},
+  reprintof        = {{Nachdruck von}{Ndr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  reprintas        = {{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{Ndr\adddotspace u\adddot\addabthinspace d\adddot\ Titel}},
+  byauthor         = {{von}{v\adddot}},
+  byeditor         = {{herausgegeben von}{hrsg\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  bycompiler       = {{kompiliert von}{komp\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  byredactor       = {{bearbeitet von}{bearb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  byfounder        = {{begr\"undet von}{begr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  bycontinuator    = {{fortgef\"urt von}{fortgef\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  bycollaborator   = {{unter Mitarbeit von}{unter Mitarb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  bytranslator     = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt von}{\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  bycommentator    = {{kommentiert von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  byannotator      = {{erl\"autert von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  withcommentator  = {{mit einem Kommentar von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  withannotator    = {{mit Erl\"auterungen von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  withintroduction = {{mit einer Einleitung von}{eingel\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+  withforeword     = {{mit einem Vorwort von}{mit einem Vorw\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  withafterword    = {{mit einem Nachwort von}{mit einem Nachw\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortr       = {{herausgegeben und \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt von}%
+                      {hrsg\adddotspace und \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditorco       = {{herausgegeben und kommentiert von}%
+                      {hrsg\adddotspace und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditoran       = {{herausgegeben und erl\"autert von}%
+                      {hrsg\adddotspace und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditorin       = {{herausgegeben und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditorfo       = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditoraf       = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortrco     = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortran     = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortrin     = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortrfo     = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortraf     = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditorcoin     = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditorcofo     = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditorcoaf     = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditoranin     = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditoranfo     = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditoranaf     = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortrcoin   = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortrcofo   = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortrcoaf   = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortranin   = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortranfo   = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  byeditortranaf   = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {hrsg., \lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatorco   = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatoran   = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatorin   = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatorfo   = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatoraf   = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatorcoin = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatorcofo = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatorcoaf = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatoranin = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatoranfo = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+  bytranslatoranaf = {{\lbx@fromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+                      {\lbx@fromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+}
+\endinput